HISTORICAL MANUALS

 
 
                                           UNIVERSITY OF KENTUCKY
                                           COMPUTING CENTER
 
                                           CMS Reference
 
                                           VM/SP Release 3
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                           UU  U KK  K   CCCC  CCCC
                                           UU  U KK K   CC    CC
                                           UU  U KKK    CC    CC
                                           UU  U KK  K  CC    CC
                                            UUU  KK   K  CCCC  CCCC
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
         Fifth Edition, Revision 0 (March 1984)
 
         Users of this manual are encouraged to report
         any errors or ambiguities, and to make
         suggestions for improvements.  The author can
         be contacted at the address below.
 
         Technical changes made to the contents of this
         manual are indicated by a vertical bar to the
         left of the change.
 
         University of Kentucky
         Computing Center
         72 McVey Hall
         Lexington, KY  40506-0045
         Phone: 606/257-2900
 
         Processed March 6, 1984-Waterloo SCRIPT - Version 82.2 (09/26/83)
 
         Prepared by Dave Elbon
 
 
 
 
                                                                        PREFACE
 
 
         This manual is designed to be used as a reference.  It contains
         detailed command syntax and usage notes for many of the commands
         (including XEDIT and its subcommands) available under the IBM Virtual
         Machine System Product (VM/SP) Conversational Monitor System (CMS)
         through the facilities of the University of Kentucky Computing Center.
         Introductory information for new users can be found in several of the
         manuals listed in the Bibliography.
 
       | Not all commands available under VM/SP are documented in this manual.
       | The intention is to cover the most commonly used commands (or at least
       | their most commonly needed functions) and commands not documented
       | elsewhere.  Most commands not included here are covered in detail in
       | either the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference or the VM/SP HPO CP
       | Command Reference for General Users.
 
       | This manual reflects changes and additions made to VM/SP at the UKCC
       | that aren't described in the IBM documentation.  When there is a
       | discrepancy between this manual and IBM documentation this manual is
       | usually correct.  Documentation for all commands is available online
       | through the HELP command, and since the online information can be
       | updated faster than printed manuals, HELP is usually the most accurate
       | source.
 
       | Refer to the Bibliography at the end of this manual for a list of
       | other manuals that may be of interest.  (Note: Some publications refer
       | to software and hardware not available under CMS at the UKCC.)
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                                  Preface     i
 
 
 
 
                                                             Summary of Changes
 
 
 
         Fifth Edition, February 1984
 
            · This edition replaces the UKCC CJS Reference and the UKCC CMS
              Programming Supplement.
            · Numerous changes have been made to reflect the new features
              available with Release 3 of VM/SP.
            · The default settings of PF10, PF11, and PF12 under XEDIT have
              changed.
            · XEDIT no longer supports EDGAR simulation mode, and the EDGAR and
              ECOMMAND commands are no longer available.
            · Minor changes and additions have been made to the XEDIT default
              characteristics for some filetypes.  Refer to Appendix A.
            · The naming convention for XEDIT AUTOSAVE files has changed.
            · Documentation has been added for several new commands, including
              HI, PASSWORD, SAS, SSORT (SyncSort), and YCALC.
            · The EXECIO command can be used in EXEC programs to perform a
              number of functions.  Since EXECIO is a nucleus resident
              function, it is much more efficient than the equivalent function
              performed by CMSDIO or one of the STKxxx commands.  The LISTFILE
              and QUERY commands now have stacking options and are both now
              nucleus resident also.  These should be used when possible
              instead of the STKxxx commands.
            · Because of the unwieldy size this manual has become, descriptions
              of the following seldom used or obsolete commands have been
              removed:  BIGFILES, CMSPUN, NEWFILES, OPTANAL, RETCODE, SETUFLG,
              STKCP, STKFILE and STKUFLG.  The commands (and online help for
              them) are still available.
            · Minor editorial changes have been made throughout the manual.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                      Summary of Changes     ii
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       CONTENTS
 
 
 
 
         Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  i
 
         Summary of Changes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
 
         Section 1.  Command Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1
 
            1.A Functional Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1
 
            1.B CMS Commands for EXEC Writers  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8
 
         Section 2.  Command Descriptions  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  9
 
         Section 3.  Command Return Codes  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  345
 
         Section 4.  Communicating With Asynchronous ASCII Terminals . . .  346
 
            4.A Asynchronous Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  346
 
            4.B ASCII Typewriter Mode  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  347
 
            4.C ASCII Display Mode Using S3270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  348
 
            4.D Exchanging Files With Personal Computers . . . . . . . . .  350
 
         Appendix A.  XEDIT Default Filetype Attributes  . . . . . . . . .  352
 
         Appendix B.  Character Translation for ASCII Communication  . . .  354
 
         Appendix C.  Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  359
 
         Bibliography  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  363
 
         Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  366
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                                               Contents     iii
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         Section 1:  Command Summaries
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
         1.A Functional Summary
 
         The tables on the following pages list the most frequently needed
         functions available under CMS and some of the commands that can
         perform them.  More information about these commands can be found in
         Section 2 of this manual.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Creating CMS Disk Files                                         |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    XEDIT     Create a CMS disk file from data entered at your      |
         |              terminal or copied from other CMS disk files.         |
         |    FCOPY     Create a CMS disk file by copying data from an        |
         |              existing CMS disk file.                               |
         |    ACCEPT    Create a CMS disk file by copying data from a reader  |
         |              spool file.                                           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Examining CMS Disk Files                                        |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    XEDIT     Examine (and modify, if necessary) a CMS disk file.   |
       | |    LEDIT     Examine and modify a very large CMS disk file.        |
         |    BROWSE    Examine a CMS disk file (for 3270-type display        |
         |              terminals only).  Unlike XEDIT, BROWSE can be used    |
         |              to examine files of any size.                         |
         |    TYPE      Type the contents of a CMS disk file at your terminal.|
         |    MATCH     Compare two CMS disk files and determine the changes  |
         |              necessary to make the first file match the second.    |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Modifying CMS Disk Files                                        |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    XEDIT     Examine and modify a CMS disk file.                   |
       | |    LEDIT     Examine and modify a very large CMS disk file.        |
       | +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     1
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       | +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Printing CMS Disk Files                                         |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    PRINT     Generate a spool file for printing from the contents  |
         |              of a CMS disk file.  You must use the SETPRT command  |
         |              to select a destination and other printing options    |
         |              before issuing the PRINT command.                     |
         |    SCRIPT    Format a document using text and control information  |
         |              in a CMS disk file.  SCRIPT can produce a spool file  |
         |              for printing, type directly at your terminal, or      |
         |              create a CMS disk file containing the formatted text. |
         |              Use SETPRT before generating a spool file for         |
         |              printing.                                             |
         |    TPRINT    Type the contents of a CMS disk file on your terminal |
         |              using carriage control characters in the file.        |
         |    LABELS    Format labels using text in a CMS disk file.          |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Producing a List of CMS Disk Files                              |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    FLIST     Produce a menu describing selected CMS disk files.    |
         |              Commands using the files may be issued from the FLIST |
         |              menu.  This command can be used only on 3270-type     |
         |              display terminals.                                    |
         |    LISTFILE  Produce a list of selected CMS disk files and the     |
         |    or LISTX  attributes of each.  Output may be directed to your   |
         |              terminal, a spool file, or a CMS disk file.           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Erasing CMS Disk Files                                          |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    BURN      Erase a selected CMS disk file (or files).            |
         |    ERASE     Erase a selected CMS disk file (or files).            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Word Processing                                                 |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    SCRIPT    Format a document using text and control information  |
         |              in a CMS disk file.  (see "Printing CMS Disk Files")  |
         |    XEDIT     Create, examine, and modify a CMS disk file.          |
         |    SPELLFIX  Check the spelling of words in a CMS disk file, and   |
         |              suggest alternatives for misspelled words.            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     2
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Other CMS Disk File Manipulations                               |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
       | |    SSORT     Sort the contents of a CMS disk file based on the data|
         |              in selected columns.                                  |
         |    CODETRAN  Translate the contents of a CMS disk file to and from |
         |              EBCDIC, ASCII, or user specified codes.               |
         |    COPYFILE  Copy one or more CMS disk files and optionally perform|
         |              specified manipulations.                              |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Sharing CMS Disk Files with Other Users                         |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    Two or more users may simultaneously have access to a CMS disk  |
         |    and read the files it contains.  Only one user should ever have |
         |    write-access to a CMS disk.  If two or more users have write-   |
         |    access to a CMS disk, the disk file directory may be corrupted  |
         |    and the files permanently lost.                                 |
         |                                                                    |
         |    AUTOLINK  Authorize other users to LINK to your CMS disk.       |
         |    LINK and  Gain access to another user's CMS disk.  The other    |
         |    ACCESS    user must have used AUTOLINK to authorize the LINK.   |
         |              After a successful LINK, you must use the ACCESS      |
         |              command before you can actually use the files.        |
         |    DROP      Release a minidisk and drop the link.                 |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Creating Plots                                                  |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    PLOT      Send a CMS disk file containing Zeta Graphic Machine  |
         |              Language (GML) instructions to be plotted on the Zeta |
         |              plotter in the UKCC Computer Room.  GML data files    |
         |              are generated by the standard plotting subroutines    |
       | |              in ZETALIB.                                           |
         |    OUTPUT    Send a reader spool file containing Zeta GML in-      |
         |              structions to be plotted in the UKCC Computer Room.   |
         |    PLOTAJ    Produce a plot on an Anderson Jacobson 832 or 833     |
         |              terminal.  The input is a CMS disk file containing    |
         |              GML instructions.  This will produce a plot with      |
         |              relatively low resolution.                            |
         |    PLOTHP    Produce a plot on a Hewlett Packard 2647a graphics    |
         |              terminal.  The input is a CMS disk file containing    |
         |              GML instructions.                                     |
         |    PLOTTEK   Produce a plot on a Tektronix (or compatible)         |
         |              graphics terminal.  The input is a CMS disk file      |
         |              containing GML instructions.                          |
       | |    SAS       The Statistical Analysis System can produce several   |
       | |              kinds of plots on supported terminals.                |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     3
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Communicating With Other CMS Users                              |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    SENDFILE  Send a CMS disk file to one or more users.            |
         |    or SFILE                                                        |
         |    NOTE      Create (using XEDIT) a note and send it to one or     |
         |              more users.                                           |
         |    OUTPUT    Send a reader spool file to another user.             |
         |    TELL      Send a brief (one line) message to one or more        |
         |              logged on users.                                      |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Examining Reader Spool Files                                    |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    PEEK      Examine a reader spool file with XEDIT.               |
         |    RBROWSE   Examine a reader spool file (for 3270-type display    |
         |              terminals only).                                      |
         |    RXEDIT    Examine a reader spool file with XEDIT.               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Printing Reader Spool Files                                     |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    OUTPUT    Send a reader spool file to be printed.               |
         |    GATHER    Gather several reader spool files into a single file. |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Producing a List of Reader Spool Files                          |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    RDRLIST   Produce a menu describing selected reader spool files.|
         |    or RLIST  This command is similar to FLIST and FILELIST and is  |
         |              most useful on a 3270-type display terminal.          |
         |    RDRCOST   Produce a list of selected reader spool files and the |
         |              attributes and estimated cost of each.                |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Erasing Reader Spool Files                                      |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    BURN      Erase (purge) a reader spool file.                    |
         |    PURGE     Erase (purge) a reader spool file or files.           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     4
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
       | |    Programming Languages                                           |
       | |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    A number of programming languages are available under CMS.  The |
         |    names of the commands generally begin with four or five letters |
         |    to indicate the language and end with one or two letters to     |
         |    indicate the function of the command.  "C" means compile, "CG"  |
         |    means compile and execute (go), and "G" means execute (go).     |
         |                                                                    |
         |    Some of the available language processors are no longer         |
         |    supported.  This means that the organization that originally    |
         |    supplied it will no longer investigate or correct problems, and |
         |    that the UKCC probably will not be able to supply consulting    |
         |    assistance.  These languages can still be used successfully,    |
         |    but if you encounter a problem you are on your own.  Use them   |
         |    at your own risk!                                               |
         |                                                                    |
         |    Assembler                                                       |
         |    ASMXC     IBM Assembler XF                                      |
         |    ASMXCG                                                          |
         |    ASMXG                                                           |
         |                                                                    |
         |    BASIC                                                           |
         |    BASIC     IBM CALL/OS BASIC interpreter  (BASIC is no longer    |
         |              supported by IBM.  WBASIC is recommended.)            |
         |    WBASIC    Waterloo BASIC interpreter                            |
         |                                                                    |
         |    COBOL                                                           |
         |    COBDC     IBM VS COBOL (with Interactive Debug)                 |
         |    COBDCG                                                          |
         |    COBDG                                                           |
         |    COBVC     IBM VS COBOL                                          |
         |    COBVCG                                                          |
         |    COBVG                                                           |
         |                                                                    |
         |    FORTRAN                                                         |
         |    FORTGC    IBM FORTRAN G  (FORTRAN G is no longer supported by   |
         |    FORTGCG   IBM.  VS FORTRAN is recommended.)                     |
         |    FORTGG                                                          |
         |    FORTVC    IBM VS FORTRAN  (VS FORTRAN conforms to the standard  |
         |    FORTVCG   known as FORTRAN 77.)                                 |
         |    FORTVG                                                          |
         |    FORTXC    IBM FORTRAN H Extended                                |
         |    FORTXCG                                                         |
         |    FORTXG                                                          |
         |    WATFIV    Waterloo FORTRAN interpreter                          |
         |                                                                    |
         |    LISP                                                            |
         |    LISP      Partial implementation of the Utah LISP interpreter.  |
         |              (not supported)                                       |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    (Continued on the next page...)                                 |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     5
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
       | |    Programming Languages (Continued)                               |
       | |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    Pascal                                                          |
         |    PAS4C     P4 Pascal  (not supported)                            |
         |    PAS4CG                                                          |
         |    PAS4G                                                           |
         |    PW        Waterloo Pascal interpreter                           |
         |    P8000     AAEC Pascal 8000  (not supported)                     |
         |                                                                    |
         |    PL/I                                                            |
         |    PLC       Cornell PL/CT interpreter                             |
         |    PLIXC     IBM PL/I Optimizer                                    |
         |    PLIXCG                                                          |
         |    PLIXG                                                           |
         |    PLIC      IBM PL/I Checkout                                     |
         |    PLICR                                                           |
         |                                                                    |
         |    SPITBOL                                                         |
         |    SPITBOL   IIT SPITBOL  (not supported)                          |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
       | |    Disk and Processor Storage                                      |
       | |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    STORAGE   Redefine the amount of processor storage available    |
         |              to programs running on your userid.  Some programming |
         |              languages and packages may require more storage than  |
         |              the initial (512K) storage size.                      |
         |    TDISK     Define a temporary CMS minidisk.  TDISK space is      |
         |              discarded when you DROP it, when you log off, when    |
         |              the system is shut down, or if there is a system      |
         |              failure.  TDISK is often needed to supply work space  |
         |              for programming language compilers.                   |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    CMS Batch                                                       |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    BATCH     Send a CMS disk file or files containing control      |
         |              statements and CMS commands to the CMS batch system   |
         |              for processing.  The BATCH command can help you       |
         |              create a CMS batch job interactively.  Output from    |
         |              your batch job can be routed back to your userid in a |
         |              reader spool file, or printed.                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     6
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    OS Batch                                                        |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    SUBMIT    Send a CMS disk file or files containing JCL and data |
         |              to the OS batch system.  Output from your batch job   |
         |              can be routed back to your userid in a reader spool   |
         |              file, or printed.                                     |
         |    STATUS    Display the status of your OS batch jobs.             |
         |    CANCEL    Cancel an OS batch job.                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Communicating with Personal Computers                           |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    The section on Asynchronous Communication contains more         |
         |    information about personal computers.                           |
         |                                                                    |
         |    TERMINAL  Set terminal communication options.                   |
       | |    KERMIT    Communicate with a personal computer or other system  |
       | |              running KERMIT.  KERMIT supports two-way file         |
       | |              exchange.  KERMIT is available (without charge) for   |
       | |              several systems, including the IBM PC.                |
         |    HOSTCM    Communicate with a personal computer acting as your   |
         |              CMS terminal.  HOSTCM supports two-way file exchange. |
         |              The personal computer must be using the Waterloo      |
         |              Computing Systems microSoftware.                      |
         |    FSEND     Send a file to a personal computer acting as your CMS |
         |              terminal.                                             |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |    Other Functions                                                 |
         |--------------------------------------------------------------------|
         |    HELP      Display documentation at your terminal.               |
         |    MANUAL    Display (at a 3270-type display) or print a manual.   |
         |    CALC      Desk calculator.                                      |
       | |    NEWS      Display online news.                                  |
       | |    KYREG     Display the online version of the Kentucky Register,  |
       | |              the UKCC's monthly newsletter.                        |
       | |    RATES     Display the current charging rates.                   |
       | |    GRIPE     Send a complaint to the UKCC User Services Group.     |
       | |    YCALC     Spreadsheet calculator.                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     7
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         1.B CMS Commands for EXEC Writers
 
         Some commands are intended primarily for use from an EXEC (some can be
         used only from an EXEC).  The following table is a summary of these
       | commands.  Refer to the description of the EXEC command in this manual
       | for more information about REXX, EXEC 2, and EXEC.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         | Command  | Function                                                |
         |----------|---------------------------------------------------------|
         | CHECKBUF | Determine the number of lines in a stack buffer         |
         | CLEAR    | Clear the screen of a display terminal                  |
         | CMDCALL  | Execute a command with a CMS extended p-list            |
         | CMSCMSG  | Write a message on the command line of a 3270 display   |
         | CMSPMSG  | Write a prompt message on the terminal                  |
         | CMSREAD  | Read and stack a line from the terminal                 |
         | CMSTIO   | Determine if a device exists                            |
         | CONWAIT  | Wait for terminal I/O to complete                       |
         | DESBUF   | Clear all console and stack buffers                     |
         | DROPBUF  | Destroy one or more CMS program stack buffers           |
         | ENVIRON  | Determine the current environment                       |
         | EXec     | Execute another EXEC                                    |
         | EXECIO   | Perform various functions from an EXEC                  |
       | | EXECOS   | Reset the OS simulation environment                     |
       | | GETFMODE | Get an available filemode (ACCESS) letter               |
       | | GETVADDR | Get an available virtual device address                 |
         | GLOBALV  | Set and examine global variables                        |
         | IDentify | Stack your userid, the date, and other information      |
       | | IMMCMD   | Establish and cancel immediate commands                 |
       | | LISTFILE | Use the STACK option to get information about files     |
         | MAKEBUF  | Create a CMS program stack buffer                       |
         | MENUEXEC | Display an XMENU panel                                  |
         | NAMEFind | Retrieve information from a NAMES file                  |
       | | QUERY    | Use the STACK option to get CMS and CP information      |
         | RANDOM   | Generate a random number                                |
         | RDR      | Determine the format of a reader spool file             |
         | SELECT   | Select records from a CMS disk file                     |
         | SENTRIES | Determine the number of lines in the CMS program stack  |
         | SPELLCHK | Check the spelling of words from file or stack          |
         | STATE    | Verify the existence of a CMS disk file                 |
         | STATEW   | Verify a file on a read/write CMS disk                  |
         | STKDATE  | Stack day, date, and time                               |
         | STKDISK  | Stack information about an accessed disk                |
         | STKID    | Stack system and userid information                     |
         | STKRDR   | Stack reader spool file numbers                         |
         | STKTERM  | Stack terminal information                              |
         | STKTIME  | Stack timing information                                |
         | STKXRDR  | Stack detailed reader spool file information            |
         | VERIFY   | Issue a message and read a yes/no response              |
         | WAITRDR  | Wait for a reader spool file to arrive                  |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
                                            Section 1:  Command Summaries     8
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
         Section 2:  Command Descriptions
 
 
 
 
         This section contains detailed descriptions of many of the commands
         available under CMS.  The conventions used in the descriptions are
         similar to those used in the IBM VM/SP publications.  Command and
         option names use uppercase and lowercase to indicate minimum
         abbreviations; parts shown in uppercase must be entered as shown.
         Brackets are used to mark optional parameters or a list of choices,
         and default values are underlined.
 
         This section includes CMS commands, CP commands, and XEDIT subcommands
         (grouped under XEDIT).  EXEC's and CP commands are marked as such to
         aid EXEC writers, since this distinction can be important.
 
       | The information in this section is available at your terminal from the
       | HELP command.  To get help for most commands just enter
 
       |      help [command]
 
       | where [command] is the name of the command.  For XEDIT subcommands,
       | and for cases when there are several commands with the same name, you
       | must specify a qualifier with the command name:
 
       |      help xedit [subcommand]
 
       |      or
 
       |      help cp [command]
 
         For commands not described in this section refer to the IBM
         documentation or online HELP for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                         Section 2:  Command Descriptions     9
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                        ? (CMS Recall Function)
 
         Use the ? function to display the previous command entered from your
         terminal or through the CMS program stack.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | ?         |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Anything following the question mark on the command line is
              ignored.
 
          2.  Commands entered while in CP mode, the ? and = functions, and the
              CMS immediate commands (HT, HX, etc.) cannot be recalled with
              this function.  Users of 3101 and 3270-type display terminals may
              use the CP RETRIEVE PF key function to display and reissue
              previously entered lines, including those not available from the
              ? function.
 
          3.  On a 3270-type display terminal the command is displayed in the
              command input area at the bottom of the screen.  The command line
              may then be modified and may be reissued by pressing ENTER.
 
          4.  The ? function may be entered only from the keyboard (including
              Program Function keys) or through the CMS program stack.  It may
              not be directly executed from an EXEC.  The CMS editors support ?
              subcommands with similar functions.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     10
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                        & (CMS Retain Function)
 
         Use the & function to execute a command and leave the command line in
         the input area of your 3270-type display terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | &         | [command line]                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         command line
                   is the command line to be executed.  The entire line
                   (including the ampersand) remains in the input area.  It may
                   be modified and may be reissued by pressing ENTER.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The command line may not use the retain (&) function.  In other
              words, no more than one ampersand is allowed on a command line.
 
          2.  The ampersand is ignored on all terminals other than 3270-type
              displays.
 
          3.  Some commands (such as CMSCMSG and the ? function) alter the
              command input line and overwrite the retained command.
 
          4.  The & function may be entered only from the keyboard (including
              Program Function keys) or through the CMS program stack.  It may
              not be directly executed from an EXEC.  Some CMS editors support
              an & subcommand with a similar function.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     11
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                         = (CMS Reuse Function)
 
         Use the = function to reissue the previous command entered from your
         terminal or through the CMS program stack.  You may follow the equal
         sign with an additional CMS command (including an equal sign) on the
         same line.  This additional command will be issued before the previous
         command is repeated.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | =         | [command line]                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         command line
                   is an optional additional command or function.  This is
                   issued before the previous command is repeated.  The = and ?
                   functions may be used.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Commands entered while in CP mode, the ? and = functions, and the
              CMS immediate commands (HT, HX, etc.) cannot be reissued with
              this function.  Users of 3101 and 3270-type terminals may use the
              CP RETRIEVE PF key function to display and reissue previously
              entered lines, including those not available from the = function.
 
          2.  Entering multiple equal signs on one line will cause the previous
              command to be repeated once for each equal sign entered.
 
          3.  The = function may be entered only from the keyboard (including
              Program Function keys) or through the CMS program stack.  It may
              not be directly executed from an EXEC.  The CMS editors support =
              subcommands with similar functions.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     12
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  ACCEPT (EXEC)
 
         Use the ACCEPT command to copy a reader spool file into a CMS disk
         file.  The reader file is purged.  ACCEPT can process any input format
         (NETDATA, print, etc.) and can be used to receive files sent with the
         NOTE and SENDFILE commands.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                +                                     |
         | ACCEPT    | |spoolid [* [fm]]|  [( options... [)]]                 |
         |           | |name [type [fm]]|                                     |
         |           | |*     *     A1  |                                     |
         |           | +                +                                     |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader spool file to be
                   processed.  The default is "*", the first file in your
                   reader.
 
         name [type]
                   select an input file by spool file name and type rather than
                   number.  (Not all spool files have names and types.)  The
                   default type is "*," the first file that matches the
                   specified name.
 
         fm        is the filemode used for the created CMS disk file.  The
                   default is "A1."  The filemode is ignored if the input file
                   is in DISK DUMP format.
 
         options   Depending on the data format, ACCEPT uses INPUT, RECEIVE,
                   DISK, or READCARD to process the file, and ACCEPT options
                   are passed to the command used.  Refer to the descriptions
                   of these commands for more information.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The parameters used to select an input spool file are handled by
              the INPUT command.  ACCEPT can use any of the parameters of the
              INPUT command.
 
          2.  When processing files in NETDATA format (used by NOTE and
              SENDFILE), ACCEPT returns an acknowledgment if one was requested
              by the originating user.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSACP024E File "[fn ft fm]" already exists.  RC=28
         DMSACP655E Reader file [n] does not exist, or is in hold.  RC=28
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     13
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  ACCEPT (EXEC)
 
         DMSACP687E File [n] is a dump file and cannot be processed.  RC=1
       | DMSACP999E Reader not ready or not operational.  RC=100
       | DMSACP999E Weird result from RDR command.  RC=100
 
         Messages may also be produced by DISK, INPUT, READCARD, and RECEIVE.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     14
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         ACCESS
 
         Use the ACCESS command to identify a minidisk to CMS and establish a
         filemode letter for the files on the disk.  This is a partial
         description of the ACCESS command; other options are available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                              +                       |
         | ACcess    | |disk mode[/ext [fn [ft [fm]]]]| [( options... [)]]    |
         |           | |191  A          *   *   *     |                       |
         |           | |                              |                       |
         |           | +                              +                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [NOIMSG]   [NOPROF]                                    |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         disk      is the virtual device address of the minidisk to be
                   accessed.  The default value is 191.
 
         mode      is the one-character filemode letter assigned to all files
                   on the disk being accessed.  If "disk" is not specified, a
                   default mode of "A" is supplied.  You should generally not
                   access disks as modes W, X, Y, or S, since these modes are
                   reserved for system use.
 
         /ext      indicates that the disk is to be a read-accessed extension
                   to the disk accessed as mode "ext".  The slash must not be
                   preceded or followed by a blank.
 
         fn [ft [fm]]
                   defines a subset of the files on the specified disk that
                   will be made accessible.  An asterisk coded in any of these
                   fields indicates that all filenames, filetypes, or filemode
                   numbers (except mode number 0) are to be included.  You may
                   also specify general forms using an asterisk suffix.  You
                   must specify both a letter and a number for the filemode.
                   This feature may not be used when accessing OS disks.
 
         Options
 
         NOIMSG    suppresses most informational messages.
 
         NOPROF    suppresses execution of the PROFILE EXEC file.  This option
                   is valid only if the ACCESS command is the first command
                   entered after you IPL CMS.  On subsequent ACCESS commands
                   the NOPROF option is ignored.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     15
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         ACCESS
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  When you log on (or when you IPL CMS), a number of disks are
              accessed automatically by CMS.  All CMS users have a write-
              accessed A-disk (191) for storing files.  Some users also have a
              D-disk (192).  The shared system S-disk (190) and Y-disk (19E)
              are accessed also.  These disks contain system files necessary
              for the operation of CMS and should not be accessed in any other
              way.  You should not issue the ACCESS command using modes S, W,
              X, or Y.
 
          2.  The Public disk is accessed with the PUBLIC command.  It is
              accessed as the Z-disk by default.
 
          3.  You can force your A-disk to read-only status by accessing it as
              an extension of itself or another disk;  for example:
 
                   access 191 a/a
 
          4.  Files on a read-accessed disk with a filemode number of 0 ("B0,"
              for example) normally are not accessible.  The documentation of
              the RENAME command discusses filemode numbers in more detail.
 
          5.  The RELEASE and DROP commands make an accessed disk inaccessible.
              DROP also drops your link to a disk, requiring you to LINK to the
              disk to make it accessible again.
 
       |  6.  If a user with write-access to a minidisk updates a file and
       |      other users with read-access then try to read that same file, the
       |      other users will get the older version of the file, garbled
       |      records, or CMS file system errors (most often "DMSxxx104S ERROR
       |      3 READING FILE").  The users with read-access should issue the
       |      ACCESS command again to use the updated file directory.  Using
       |      filemode number 6 for shared files can eliminate this problem in
       |      some applications.
 
          7.  The OSDISK command will access the OS volumes containing user
              data sets.  These disks are accessed starting with mode H, and
       |      you should not access other disks using modes H through V if you
       |      use OS data sets from CMS.  You should not access the OS disks by
              issuing ACCESS yourself; always use the OSDISK command to be
              certain that all of the current user volumes are available to
              you.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     16
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   AJ833 (EXEC)
 
         Use the AJ833 command to prepare an Anderson Jacobson model 833
         terminal with the High Speed Option for printing SCRIPT and other text
         output.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | AJ833     | [On|OFF]                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         On        prepares both the terminal and VM/SP to use some of the
                   special features of an Anderson Jacobson 833 terminal.
 
         OFF       stops use of the special features.
 
         Usage Note
 
         AJ833 changes the CMS output translate table to properly produce
         boxes.  IDLE characters are translated to NULL to increase printing
         speed.  ETX/ACK protocol, which allows the terminal to receive data at
         1200 baud, is enabled.  This requires the High Speed Option of the AJ
         833 terminal.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         AJ833 may produce messages from the CMS SET command and the CP
         TERMINAL command.  Attempting to issue this command from other than an
         asynchronous ASCII terminal will result in an error message and a non-
         zero return code.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     17
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   ASMXC (EXEC)
 
         Use the ASMXC command to assemble a program with the IBM VM Assembler
         (Assembler XF).
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | ASMXC     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the
                   assembler source program.  The filetype of the file must be
                   "ASSEMBLE," and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte
                   records.  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         options   are assembler options.  The assembler has options to control
                   its output, listings produced, and other functions.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  ASMXC uses the default macro libraries for CMS: CMSUKCC, DMSSP,
              CMSLIB, XMENU, OSMACRO, and TSOMAC.  You cannot use ASMXC if you
              need other macro libraries.
 
          2.  Refer to the description of the ASSEMBLE command for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     18
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  ASMXCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the ASMXCG command to assemble (using the IBM VM Assembler) and
         execute a program.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | ASMXCG    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the
                   assembler source program.  The filetype of the file must be
                   "ASSEMBLE," and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte
                   records.  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         options   are assembler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  ASMXC uses the default macro libraries for CMS: CMSUKCC, DMSSP,
              CMSLIB, XMENU, OSMACRO, and TSOMAC.  You cannot use ASMXC if you
              need other macro libraries.
 
          2.  The default subroutine libraries are used: ZETALIB and CMSLIB.
              If you need to use additional libraries or load additional object
              files you must use the ASMXG command to execute your program.
 
          3.  The assembled program is loaded and executed.  Refer to the
              descriptions of the ASSEMBLE and LOAD commands for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     19
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   ASMXG (EXEC)
 
         Use the ASMXG command to execute a previously assembled program.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | ASMXG     | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the
                   object program.  The filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  ZETALIB and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the ASMXC and ASSEMBLE commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     20
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       ASSEMBLE
 
         Use the ASSEMBLE command to assemble a program with the IBM VM
         Assembler (Assembler XF).  The ASMXCG, ASMXC, and ASMXG commands also
         are available for use with assembler programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | Assemble  | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the
                   assembler source program.  The filetype of the file must be
                   "ASSEMBLE," and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte
                   records.  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         options   are assembler options.  ASSEMBLE has options to control its
                   output, listings produced, and other functions.
 
         Usage Note
 
          1.  Detailed descriptions of the assembler options are available in
              the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference and from the HELP
              command.  A description of the assembler language can be found in
              the OS/VS-DOS/VSE-VM/370 Assembler Language manual.  The language
              is an extended version of that used by OS Assembler F.
 
          2.  When writing programs to run under CMS, the following macro
              libraries should be specified on a GLOBAL MACLIB command (in this
              order):
 
                   CMSUKCC DMSSP CMSLIB
 
              Depending on your application, you may also need the XMENU,
              OSMACRO, and TSOMAC libraries.  Use OSMACRO for programs that use
              OS simulation or are to be run under the OS batch system.  You
              can create your own macro libraries with the MACLIB command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     21
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                AUTOLINK (EXEC)
 
         Use the AUTOLINK command to authorize other users to access your CMS
         disk files.  Once authorized by you, another user can use the LINK and
         ACCESS commands to gain access to your CMS disk files.  AUTOLINK can
         also be used to revoke authorizations, examine existing authorization
         rules, and assign another user to act as your proxy.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | AUTOLINK  | function [( option [)]]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Functions:                                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | ASSIGN proxy                                           |
         |           | AUTH disk level rule1 [| rule2 [| rules] ... ]         |
         |           | DELete disk rulenumber                                 |
         |           | Display disk [rulenumber|ALL]                          |
         |           | DROP proxy                                             |
         |           | EXClude disk level rule1 [| rule2 [| rules] ... ]      |
         |           | FOR userid function                                    |
         |           | LOCK disk                                              |
         |           | Query [disk [ALL]|SYSTEM]                              |
         |           | SENDLog disk                                           |
         |           | SET LOG disk level logmode                             |
         |           | UNLOCK disk                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [MSG | NOMSG | SMSG]                                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ASSIGN proxy
                   designates a user who may act as your proxy.  The designated
                   user (or users) may use the AUTOLINK FOR function to issue
                   AUTOLINK commands for you.  Use the AUTOLINK DROP function
                   to drop a proxy designation.
 
         AUTH disk level rule1 [| rule2] ...
                   authorizes one or more users to LINK to your minidisk with
                   virtual address "disk."  The "level" parameter specifies the
                   level of access allowed: R (read), W (write if no other
                   links), M (write if no write links), or X (write even if
                   other write links).  Warning! You should not specify level
                   X.  If two or more users simultaneously have write-access to
                   a CMS minidisk (even if they do not modify any files) the
                   disk file directory for that minidisk may be destroyed and
                   the files permanently lost.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     22
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                AUTOLINK (EXEC)
 
                   The simplest kind of rule is "USER userid," which grants
                   access to a single user.  More complex rules are discussed
                   in the Usage Notes.
 
         DELete disk rulenumber
                   deletes the specified authorization rule for the specified
                   minidisk.  The AUTOLINK DISPLAY function can be used to
                   display existing rules.
 
         Display disk [rulenumber|ALL]
                   displays the complete history of a specific authorization
                   rule or a brief list of all rules for a particular minidisk.
 
         DROP proxy
                   revokes a proxy granted with the AUTOLINK ASSIGN function.
 
         EXClude disk level rule1 [| rule2] ...
                   defines exclusion rules for a minidisk.  Use AUTOLINK
                   EXCLUDE to exclude users from a group defined with the
                   AUTOLINK AUTH function.  The syntax of this function is the
                   same as that of the AUTOLINK AUTH function.  Refer to the
                   Usage Notes for more information.
 
         FOR userid function
                   is used to issue an AUTOLINK function for another user.
                   Before you can use this function, the other user must have
                   used AUTOLINK ASSIGN to make your userid a proxy.  A proxy
                   may not issue the ASSIGN, DROP, or FOR functions for another
                   user.
 
         LOCK disk
                   temporarily prevents any links to the specified minidisk
                   from any users except the owner or the proxy who issued the
                   AUTOLINK LOCK.  Use the AUTOLINK UNLOCK function to allow
                   access by authorized users.  Locking a minidisk will not
                   affect any existing links.
 
         Query [disk [ALL] | SYSTEM]
                   displays information about the specified minidisk, or about
                   the AUTOLINK system.
 
         SENDLog disk
                   causes the access log for the specified minidisk to be sent
                   to you in a spool file.  The system clears the log after
                   sending a copy.  Use the AUTOLINK SET LOG function to enable
                   access logging.
 
         SET LOG disk level logmode
                   enables access logging for the specified minidisk.  The
                   "level" may be specified as R (read), W (write), or M
                   (mult).  The "logmode" may be specified as NONE, AUTH, FAIL,
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     23
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                AUTOLINK (EXEC)
 
                   or ALL.  Use the AUTOLINK SENDLOG function to retrieve the
                   access log.
 
         UNLOCK disk
                   unlocks a minidisk after AUTOLINK LOCK has been used.
 
         Options
 
         MSG       causes AUTOLINK responses to be sent to you with a heading
                   and time-stamp.
 
         NOMSG     suppresses AUTOLINK responses.
 
         SMSG      causes AUTOLINK responses to be sent using the SMSG
                   interface.  The last line will contain "===> END OF RESPONSE
                   <===."  This option is provided for special purposes and
                   should not be specified by CMS users.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Once authorized by you, another user can access your CMS disk
              files with the LINK and ACCESS commands.  You can restrict
              another user to read-access, or permit write-access.  You should
              not allow X-level access (which permits MW links) because CMS
              does not support write-access to a minidisk from more than one
              user.  If two or more users simultaneously have write-access to a
              minidisk, the disk file directory may be destroyed and the files
              permanently lost.  For more information about sharing CMS disk
              files refer to the descriptions of the LINK and ACCESS commands.
 
          2.  The rule definitions used by the AUTOLINK AUTH and EXCLUDE
              functions allow you to authorize or exclude a single userid, or a
              group of userids, and restrict access by date, time, and number
              of LINKs.  The following forms can be used:
 
                  Form                 Defines
                  ---------------      -------------------------------------
                  USER userid          A single userid
                  USER pattern*        Any userid that begins with "pattern"
                  FROM time            Time limits using day, date, and time
                  TO time              Time limits using day, date, and time
                  COUNT n              Number of times the rule may be used
 
              Time limits may be specified using a day of the week, a time
              (hh:mm[:ss]), or a date [mm/dd[/yy]), or any combination
              specified in any order.
 
          3.  Unless NOMSG or SMSG is specified, AUTOLINK uses CP messages to
              return responses to you.  If you have SET MSG OFF these responses
              will be suppressed.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     24
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                BALANCE
 
         Use the BALANCE command to obtain the allocation and balance for your
         userid.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                       +     +                          |
         | BALANCE   |  [target]  [( [Type]  |Stack|  [QUIET] [)]]            |
         |           |                       |Lifo |                          |
         |           |                       |Fifo |                          |
         |           |                       +     +                          |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         target    is the userid or project number to be checked.  The default
                   is your userid.  If you specify a userid or project number
                   for which you are not authorized the balance will not be
                   returned and the system will record the attempt.
 
         Options
 
         Fifo      puts the data in the stack (first-in, first-out).
 
         Lifo      is a synonym for STACK.
 
         QUIET     suppresses all error messages.  If an error occurs the
                   return code indicates the nature of the error.  This option
                   is intended for use in an EXEC.
 
         Stack     puts the data in the stack (last-in, first-out).
 
         Type      displays the data on the terminal.  This is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The allocation and balance returned are for the userid or project
              number specified.  If the target does not have an allocation the
              information will be from the userid or project containing the
              allocation used by the target.  The balance is not available for
              some userids and project numbers.
 
          2.  The stacking options (STACK, LIFO, and FIFO) put a single line
              containing the following data on the program stack:
 
               1. An asterisk (*)
               2. If no target was specified, the four-digit department number
                  If a target was specified, four asterisks (****)
               3. If no target was specified, the five-digit project number
                  If a target was specified, five asterisks (****)
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     25
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                BALANCE
 
               4. Balance (dollars)
               5. Balance (cents)
               6. Allocation (dollars)
               7. Allocation (cents)
               8. Userid or project containing allocation used by the target
               9. Allocation
              10. Balance
              11. Logon-time allocation
              12. Logon-time balance
              13. Disk space allocation
              14. Disk space balance
 
          3.  The balance is updated for OS batch jobs and printed output when
              they occur, CMS sessions are charged at the end of each day
              (after midnight), and plotting and other charges are added at the
              end of each month.
 
          4.  In a CMS Batch job the default target is the project number to
              which the job will be charged.  CMS Batch jobs cannot obtain the
              balance for other userids or project numbers.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         In case of an error, the return code will be the message number.
 
         OUIBAL001E "[string]" is an extraneous parameter.
         OUIBAL001E "[string]" is not a valid parameter.
         OUIBAL002E "[string]" is not an option.
         OUIBAL011E You are not authorized for this service.
         OUIBAL011E This attempt has been recorded.
         OUIBAL012E Sorry, but this transaction cannot be completed at this
                    time.
         OUIBAL012E Try again later.
         OUIBAL013E No record found for [target].
         OUIBAL014E You are not authorized to access data for [target].
         OUIBAL014E This attempt has been recorded.
         OUIBAL020E The balance is not available for [target].
         OUIBAL100E Error code [code] from an IUCV function.
         OUIBAL101E An IUCV handler already exists for service name.
                    Communication cannot be established.
         OUIBAL102E An IUCV DECLARE BUFFER has already been issued. CMS IUCV
                    support cannot be initialized.
         OUIBAL103E Service is shutting down and cannot accept requests; try
                    again later.
         OUIBAL104E IUCV message limit exceeded.
         OUIBAL105E IUCV priority messages are not allowed.
         OUIBAL106E Service is not available; try again later.
         OUIBAL107E Service is not running; try again later.
         OUIBAL108E Maximum number of IUCV connections exceeded for your
                    userid.
         OUIBAL109E No service connections are available; try again later.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     26
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                BALANCE
 
         OUIBAL110E Not enough storage available.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     27
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BASIC
 
         Use the BASIC command to run a program with CALL/OS BASIC.  CALL/OS
         BASIC is not supported; Waterloo BASIC (WBASIC) generally should be
         used for new programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | BASIC     | filename [( [LONG] [)]]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the file containing the BASIC program.
                   The filetype must be "BASIC," and it must contain fixed-
                   length records.
 
         LONG      causes long precision floating-point to be used.  Short
                   floating-point is used by default.
 
         Statements
 
         CHAIN   DIM     GOSUB   LET     PAUSE   REM     STOP
         CLOSE   END     GOTO    MAT     PRINT   RESET   USE
         DATA    FOR     IF      NEXT    PUT     RESTORE
         DEF     GET     INPUT   OPEN    READ    RETURN
 
         Arithmetic Functions
 
         ABS abs. value  CSC cosecant     INT int. part   SEC secant
         ACS arccosine   DEG rad-to-deg   LGT log 10      SGN sign
         ASN arcsine     EXP natural exp  LOG log e       SIN sine
         ATN arctangent  HCS hyper. cos.  LTW log 2       SQR square root
         COS cosine      HSN hyper. sin.  RAD deg-to-deg  TAN tangent
         COT cotangent   HTN hyper. tan.  RND random
 
         Usage Note
 
          1.  Line numbers are required only if needed as the target of a GOTO.
 
          2.  BASIC supplies the following built-in constants: &E (2.718282),
              &PI (3.141593), and &SQR2 (1.414214).
 
          3.  No additional information is available.
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     28
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
         The BATCH command is your interface with the CMS Batch system.  It can
         submit jobs (and assist in their preparation), change job parameters
         after submission, cancel jobs, hold and release jobs, and query the
         CMS Batch system for information.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |         |                                                          |
         | BATch   | [function  [( options...  [)]]                           |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | Functions:                                               |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | macroname [parms]                                        |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | Submit  [fileid [fileid2...]]                            |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         |         +      +                                         |
         |         |         |jobid |                                         |
         |         | CAncel  |ACTIVE|                                         |
         |         |         |ALL   |                                         |
         |         |         |QUEUE |                                         |
         |         |         +      +                                         |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         |         +               +                                |
         |         |         |All            |                                |
         |         |         |Current        |                                |
         |         | Query   |Job jobid      |                                |
         |         |         |User userid | *|                                |
         |         |         |System         |                                |
         |         |         +               +                                |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | CHange  [jobid]                                          |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         |         +     +                                          |
         |         | Hold    |jobid|                                          |
         |         | Release |ALL  |                                          |
         |         |         +     +                                          |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | Options:                                                 |
         |         |                                                          |
         |         | +       +  +     +  +            +                       |
         |         | |Clear  |  |Long |  |Msgcount n  |                       |
         |         | |NOClear|  |Short|  |         100|                       |
         |         | +       +  +     +  +            +                       |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     29
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
         Functions
 
         CAncel    cancels the specified jobs, before or during execution.
 
         CHange    permits you to change the parameters (/SET, etc.)  of a job
                   which has already been submitted but has not yet begun
                   execution.  Changes are made interactively; the BATCH
                   command will prompt you for required information.
 
         Hold      places the specified jobs on hold.  CMS Batch will not
                   schedule held jobs for execution.
 
         macroname executes the specified batch macro.  The filetype must be
                   "BATCH."  CMS Batch macros may contain EXEC 2 statements,
                   BATCH command functions, batch jobs, and CMS commands.  Each
                   line in the file is treated as a command until a line
                   containing /JOB is encountered, indicating the start of a
                   batch job.  Additional commands may follow the /* at the end
                   of the job.
 
         Query     displays information about your CMS Batch jobs.  QUERY
                   CURRENT, the default, displays all of your jobs currently in
                   the system.
 
         Release   releases the specified jobs so they can be scheduled for
                   execution.  This will not release a job held by the
                   operator.
 
         Submit    initiates job preparation and submission.  If no fileid is
                   included, BATCH assumes that you want assistance preparing a
                   job; otherwise, the files specified are submitted as one
                   batch job.  If a fileids is specified BATCH will not prompt
                   for additional information.
 
                   The first file specified must contain all of the job control
                   statements for the job.  Any additional files are included
                   as data files for use by the job.  If only one fileid is
                   specified (which is the usual case), you need only supply a
                   filename, and the default filetype ("BATCH") and filemode
                   ("*") are used.  When submitting a single file you can omit
                   the keyword "SUBMIT."
 
         Parameters
 
         ACTIVE    specifies that all of your active jobs will be affected by
                   the function.
 
         ALL       specifies that all of your jobs in the batch system will be
                   affected by the function.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     30
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
         Current   specifies that all of your jobs in the batch system are to
                   be checked.
 
         fileid    is the filename, filetype, and filemode of a CMS disk file.
                   The filetype and filemode are optional when only one fileid
                   is specified.
 
         jobid     is a job identifier.  All jobs submitted to the CMS Batch
                   system are assigned an identifying number.  (When you use
                   this number you need not enter any leading zeros.)  You also
                   have the option of providing your own identifier when you
                   submit a job, or adding an identifier with the CHANGE
                   function.
 
         Job       indicates that you want a history of activity for a
                   specified job.  This history does not include any job
                   parameters.  Use the change function if you want to see job
                   characteristics.
 
         parms     are parameters that are passed to the specified macro.
 
         QUEUE     specifies that all of your jobs waiting in the queue will be
                   affected by the function.
 
         System    indicates that you want general information about the batch
                   system's activities.  This includes queue lengths and
                   scheduling criteria.
 
         User      indicates that you want to query current status for all jobs
                   owned by a specified user.
 
         userid    specifies a particular userid.  You may use an asterisk to
                   indicate your own userid.
 
         Options
 
         Clear     causes the BATCH command to clear the terminal screen at
                   appropriate times.  This is the default.
 
         Long      causes BATCH to use long prompts when operating in
                   interactive mode.  This is the default.
 
         Msgcount n
                   is the maximum number of messages that will be returned by a
                   QUERY function (not including header lines).  The default is
                   100.  MSGCOUNT 0 will suppress all QUERY responses.
 
         Noclear   inhibits the screen clearing normally done by the BATCH
                   command.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     31
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
         Short     causes BATCH to use short prompts when operating in
                   interactive mode.
 
         Job Status Codes
 
         The following job status codes are used by the BATCH QUERY function:
 
         ABN  Abnormal termination           RST  Restart in progress
         ACT  Active                         RUN  Waiting in queue (hi prio)
         CMP  Completed normally             S/U  Held by user and operator
         CRS  System crash and RESTART=NO    SKD  Selected for execution
         DSP  Dispatched, but not started    SQU  Waiting in queue (chained)
         JCE  JCL error                      SYS  Held by operator
         NUL  Null job (no commands)         TPW  Waiting for tape drive
         MCN  Cancelled by batch monitor     UAB  Abended by BATKILL command
         NOT  Not a job                      UCN  Cancelled by user
         OCN  Cancelled by operator          UNK  Unknown
         QUE  Waiting in queue               USR  Held by user
 
         Job Control Statement Summary
 
         /*   marks the end of the job or an in-stream (/FILE) file.
 
         // comment
              is a comment.  This is allowed only in batch macros.
 
         CHAIN jobid1 [jobid2 ... jobid8]
              is used to specify a list of jobs that must successfully complete
              before this job can execute.
 
         /ERROR PRINT=destination
              causes a diagnostic listing of the job control statements in the
              job to be produced.
 
         /FILE filename filetype
              marks the beginning of an in-stream data file.  The file will be
              given the specified name.  The data must be terminated with a /*
              statement.
 
         /HOLD
              causes the job to be placed in USER hold.  The BATCH RELEASE
              command is used to release the job for execution.
 
         /IDENT jobname
              assigns a user job name.  This is only required for use with job
              chaining (/CHAIN).
 
         /INCLUDE filename filetype
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     32
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
              causes the specified file to be copied to the batch server's
              temporary working disk.  Since your batch job has read-access to
              your A-disk and D-disk, files on these disks can usually be
              accessed directly.  /INCLUDE is only necessary when the file
              might change while the job is executing, or if the file is
              modified by the job.
 
         /JOB [userid username]
              is required at the beginning of each CMS Batch job.  The userid
              and name are optional.
 
         /QUERY PRINT=destination
              specifies that you want a system status and history listing.
 
         /SET CARDS=[5000|limit]
              DUMP=[NO|YES]
              LINES=[2000|limit]
              NOTIFY=[YES|NO]
              PRINT=destination[=HOLD]
              PUNCH=destination[=HOLD]
              RATE=[DAY|NIGHT|WEEKEND|HOLIDAY]
              RESTART=[YES|NO]
       |      SIZE=[1|2|3]
              TIME=[10|seconds]
              sets job parameters.  CARDS, LINES, and TIME are limits for the
              job.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  A CMS batch job is executed by a special CMS userid called a
              "batch server."  It is logged on to execute a single job and logs
              off when the job is completed.  The batch server has read-access
              to the files on your A-disk (and D-disk, if you have one) and
       |      write-access to a 500 kilobyte temporary disk.  One, two, or
       |      three megabytes of virtual storage are provided.
 
          2.  Because of limitations in CMS disk file management, you should
              not change the files on your disks that are being used by an
              executing CMS Batch job.  (You will receive a message from the
              batch system when your job begins execution.)  Since the batch
              server has only read-access to your files there is no danger of
              damage to the files involved, but changing a file that is being
              used as input by a batch job will almost certainly cause the
       |      batch job to fail or produce incorrect results.  (Using filemode
       |      number 6 can eliminate this problem in some applications.) You
       |      may alter or erase any of your files that are not in use by a
              batch job.
 
          3.  The BATCH command operates either interactively or non-
              interactively.  Interactive mode is used when you do not supply a
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     33
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          BATCH
 
              function or all required parameters on the command line.  This
              mode can be used to create all job control statements.  When the
              BATCH command is in interactive mode you can respond to any
              prompt with a ? if you need more information.
 
          4.  CMS batch jobs require only two control statements: /JOB at the
              beginning and /* at the end.  For example:
 
                   /JOB
                   SCRIPT MYFILE ( PRT
                   /*
 
              would process a file named "MYFILE SCRIPT" on your A-disk and
              send the formatted output back to your userid in a spool file.
 
          5.  Batch macros are similar to XEDIT macros.  Anything that is
              allowed in an EXEC 2 file is allowed in a macro, and the BATCH
              command functions (SUBMIT, QUERY, CANCEL, etc.) can all be used
              as subcommands within a macro.  Each causes a return code to be
              set.  The SUBMIT function sets the variables &SYSJOBID and
              &USRJOBID.  A QUERY function for a specific job sets the &JOBSTAT
              variable with a job status code.
 
          6.  More information about the CMS Batch system is available in the
              UKCC CMS Batch User's Guide and from the HELP command.  Try HELP
              BATCH MENU for more information about job control statements.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     34
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        BATKILL
 
         Use the BATKILL command in a CMS Batch job to terminate the job.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | BATKILL   |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  BATKILL is intended for use in an EXEC that is executed in a
              batch job.  The EXEC could check for errors or unusual conditions
              and issue the BATKILL command if further processing would be
              wasted.  Jobs terminated with BATKILL are not considered to have
              completed normally by the CMS Batch job chaining facility.
 
          2.  If used outside of a CMS Batch job, BATKILL sets a return code of
              zero and has no further effect.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     35
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         BROWSE
 
         Use the BROWSE command to examine a CMS disk file from a 3270-type
         terminal.  BROWSE cannot be used to modify a file (although it can be
         used to erase a file); but unlike XEDIT, it can be used to examine any
         file, regardless of size.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |           +          +        ++                       |
         | BRowse    | filename  |filetype  |filemode|| [( [options...] [)]]  |
         |           |           | *        | *      ||                       |
         |           |           +          +        ++                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
       | |           | [Bottom]  [Noclear]  [Member membername]               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Help fn]  [Profile [([fn [ft [fm [)]]]]]]             |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the file to be examined.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file to be examined.  If no filetype
                   is specified, the first file with the correct filename will
                   be used.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file to be examined.  The default
                   value is "*".
 
         Options
 
       | Bottom    causes BROWSE to initially display the last (bottom) part of
       |           the file.  Without this option the top of the file is
       |           displayed initially.
 
         Help fn   specifies the name of an EXEC to be called by the HELP
                   subcommand.  The default name is "HBROWSE".
 
         Member membername
                   displays the specified member of a CMS library immediately
                   at entry to BROWSE.
 
         Noclear   specifies that the screen is not to be cleared by BROWSE.
 
         Profile (fn ft fm)
                   specifies a file to be used as the BROWSE  profile.  The
                   default is "BROWSE $PROFILE *".
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     36
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         BROWSE
 
         Keyboard Functions
 
         PA1       will transfer control to CP and clear the screen.  A CP READ
                   status will be displayed.  Enter BEGIN to return to BROWSE.
 
         PA2       will transfer control to CMS subset and clear the screen.  A
                   VM READ or RUNNING status will be displayed.  Enter RETURN
                   to return to BROWSE.
 
         PFnn      will execute the subcommand defined for the Program Function
                   key that is pressed.  The PF key definitions are contained
                   in the BROWSE profile (see below).  Use the DSPF subcommand
                   to display their current settings.
 
         BROWSE Subcommands
 
         BROWSE is a read-only editor and supports subcommands for searching,
         examining, and erasing a file.  The following subcommands can be
         entered on the command line at the top of the display area:
 
         n         makes record "n" the top line in the current level.
 
         =         repeats the last command for this level.
 
         ?[?]      displays the last command entered for this level.  The
                   command will be executed only if you press the ENTER key.
                   If two question marks are entered, the second most recent
                   command entered for this level is displayed.
 
         &         can be used as a prefix for BROWSE subcommands to leave the
                   subcommand on the command line after execution; this allows
                   repeated execution of a command by just pressing ENTER.
 
         Backward n
                   scrolls the screen window backwards (toward the top of the
                   file) "n" screens.  The default is one screen.
 
         BOttom    displays the last screen of a file or CMS library member.
 
       | BURN      erases the current file and ends the current level.
 
         Case x    controls translation of character strings used with the
                   locate (/) subcommand.  Specify "U" (for uppercase) to
                   ignore case during comparisons, or "M" (for mixed case) if
                   case is significant.  The default is "U".
 
       | CP ...    executes a specified CP command.
 
         DIct      displays the names of the members in a CMS library.
 
       | DISCARD   erases the current file and ends the current level.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     37
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         BROWSE
 
         Down n    moves the screen window down (toward the end of the file)
                   "n" lines.  The default is one line.
 
         DSpf      displays the current settings of the PF keys.
 
         Enter [fn|* [ft|* [fm|*]]]
                   creates a new BROWSE level within the current file or a
                   split-screen display of a file not currently displayed.  The
                   screen will be split the first time a new level is created.
 
         Forward n scrolls the screen window forward (toward the end of the
                   file) "n" screens.  The default is one screen.
 
       | LAst      is a synonym for BOTTOM.
 
         Left n    scrolls the screen window "n" columns to the left.  The
                   default is the width of the screen.
 
         Member [membername]
                   displays a member within a CMS library.  If "membername" is
                   unspecified, the last selected member is redisplayed.  If a
                   member is found, member-select mode is entered and the
                   member name is displayed after the filename in the level
                   header.  Scroll and locate subcommands will be applied to
                   the selected member only.  Use the DICT or QUIT subcommands
                   or the PF key function END to leave member-select mode.  If
                   member-select mode was entered through the MEMBER
                   subcommand, the PF key function END and the QUIT subcommand
                   will display the dictionary.  If entered through the MEMBER
                   option, the level is terminated.
 
         Next n    is a synonym for DOWN.
 
         QQuit     is a synonym for QUIT.
 
         Quit      ends the current level (or displays the dictionary if
                   member-select mode was entered with a MEMBER subcommand).
 
         Right n   scrolls the screen window "n" columns to the right.  The
                   default is the width of the screen.
 
         Set [Hex On|OFf|Char] [Numbers On|OFf]
                   controls the display of line numbers and the screen data
                   format.  HEX ON displays data in hexadecimal.  HEX CHAR
                   displays data in both hexadecimal and character forms.  The
                   initial settings are HEX OFF and NUMBERS OFF.  If no
                   parameters are specified, the current settings are
                   displayed.
 
         Top       displays the first screen of a file or CMS library member.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     38
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         BROWSE
 
         Up n      moves the screen window up (toward the top of the file) "n"
                   lines.  The default is one line.
 
         View n    displays the specified column of the input records in column
                   one of the screen.  If no parameter is specified, the
                   current column setting is displayed.
 
         /string[/n [m]]
                   (Locate) searches for "string" in the current level and, if
                   found, makes the located line the top line for the level.
                   If CASE U (the default) is in effect, the case of the
                   letters in the string and in the data is ignored.  Column
                   boundaries for the search may be specified with the "n" and
                   "m" arguments.  Note that the closing delimiter is only
                   required if boundaries are given.
 
         The BROWSE Profile
 
         A search is made at initialization for the BROWSE profile.  The
         profile is a CMS file named "BROWSE $PROFILE *" (or a specified
         substitute) that is used to set PF key functions and specify special
         options.  The profile may contain either variable or fixed-length
         records up to 132 bytes long.  After processing the profile, any lines
         in the CMS stack are processed as if they were also profile records.
 
         The profile may contain the following types of records:
 
         *OPTION options
                   The only option is "EXITCLR."  This causes BROWSE to clear
              the screen before terminating, which is useful if BROWSE is
              invoked from another environment that uses full-screen support.
 
         *PFKEYS nn function
                   Define Program Function key "nn" as "function."  The
              following functions can be used here (those marked with an
              asterisk can be used only from PF keys):
 
               Name  Description
               BOT   Display the last page of a file or member.
              *BRN   Erase the file and end the level.
              *CAN   Cancel all levels.
              *CCL   Make the line indicated by the cursor the top line.
              *DSPC  Display cursor position (record number and column).
              *END   End level containing the cursor.
              *RPTF  Repeat the last locate function.
              *SCB   Scroll backward (toward top of file).
              *SCF   Scroll forward (toward end of file).
              *SCL   Scroll left the screen width.
              *SCR   Scroll right the screen width.
              *SPL   Move the split to the line indicated by the cursor.
               TOP   Display first page of a file or member.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     39
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         BROWSE
 
         Usage Note
 
         Characters that cannot be displayed on a 3270-type display screen are
         represented by dots.  Use SET HEX CHAR or SET HEX ON to determine the
         actual character in such a case.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         BROWSE does not issue error messages, but can generate the following
         return codes:
 
            1  Console not a 3270-type terminal.
            2  Insufficient free storage available.
           28  File not found.
         1xxx  Error xxx reading input file (see CMSDIO command
               for meaning of "xxx").
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     40
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                    BURN (EXEC)
 
         Use the BURN command to erase a CMS disk file or purge a reader spool
         file.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                            +                         |
         | BURN      | |filename filetype [filemode]|                         |
         |           | |spoolid                     |                         |
         |           | +                            +                         |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of a file to be erased.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file.  The default filemode is "A."
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of a reader file to be purged.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  BURN can be issued from virtually any environment under CMS.
              BURN is accepted by XEDIT, FLIST, PEEK, FILELIST, RLIST, BROWSE,
              and RBROWSE.  If the file identifier is not specified when
              issuing BURN as a subcommand from one of these environments, the
              current file is erased or purged, and the editors will also QUIT.
 
          2.  When purging a reader spool file in NETDATA format (used by the
              NOTE and SENDFILE commands), BURN will issue an acknowledgment if
              one was requested by the originating user.
 
          3.  BURN supports all of the options of the ERASE command.  Refer to
              the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference or online Help for
              details on other features of the ERASE command.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSBRN001E No file specified.  RC=24
         DMSBRN920E Reader file [n] could not be found.  RC=28
 
         Messages may also be produced by the ERASE, PURGE, and RECEIVE
         commands.
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     41
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           CALC
 
         The CALC command provides desk calculator functions by placing you in
         calculator mode, allowing assignment statements and CALC subcommands
         to be processed.  Use the QUIT subcommand to leave calculator mode.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CALC      |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         CALC Subcommands
 
         var = expression
                   is the CALC assignment statement.  CALC variables are
                   identified by single letters.  The syntax of the expression
                   is like that used by the FORTRAN and BASIC programming
                   languages, accepting arithmetic operators (+, *, etc.) and
                   functions (LOG, SIN, SQRT, etc.).
 
         Clear var ...
                   sets one or more variables to zero.  All 26 variables (A
                   through Z) are initially set to zero.
 
         Display   causes the result of each assignment statement to be
                   displayed.  This is the initial setting.
 
         Integer var ...
                   makes one or more variables integers and sets them to zero.
                   Variables I through N are initially integers.
 
         Nodisplay suppresses the display of the result of assignments.
 
         Perform filename
                   reads and executes commands from a CMS disk file.  The
                   filetype of the file must be "CALC" and all subcommands in
                   the file must be in uppercase.  The PERFORM subcommand
                   cannot be executed from a file.
 
         Quit      ends CALC.
 
         Real var ...
                   makes one or more variables real (floating point) and sets
                   them to zero.  Variables A through H and O through Z are
                   initially real.
 
         Type var ...
                   displays the current value of one or more variables.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     42
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           CALC
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  CALC uses a question mark to prompt for commands.
 
          2.  The following example illustrates how CALC could be used to make
              a few simple calculations.  Commands from the user are in
              lowercase; responses from CALC and CMS are in uppercase.
 
                     calc
                     ?
                     r=10.75*40
                     R=430.0
                     ?
                     f=r*.067
                     F=28.810
                     ?
                     s=r*52
                     S=22360.0
                     ?
                     quit
                     R;  $0.01 15:22:44
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CALC produces warning messages when it detects errors, but doesn't
         terminate until the QUIT subcommand is issued.  CALC always sets a
         return code of zero.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     43
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         CANCEL
 
         Use the CANCEL command to cancel OS batch jobs and HASP printed output
         submitted from your userid.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CANCEL    | jobnumber                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         jobnumber is the job number of the OS batch job or HASP print job to
                   be canceled.  The job number is the last three digits of the
                   runid, but must be entered without leading zeroes.
 
         Usage Note
 
         If the specified job or output is found and was submitted from your
         userid, the job will be canceled and a message will be sent confirming
         that the CANCEL command was accepted.  Only the current job activity
         is canceled when you issue CANCEL.  For example, if your job was
         executing or waiting for execution, some printed output will still be
         produced.  A second CANCEL will delete the printed output in such a
         case.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSCAN070E "[name]" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSCAN923E A job number was not specified.  RC=24
         DMSCAN930E [batch] is not available.  RC=101
       | DMSCAN943E Error "[code]" from VMCF [function].  RC=100
 
         Responses may also be sent by HASP and the OS batch system.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     44
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           CASE
 
         Use the CASE command to force all CMS terminal output to uppercase or
         lowercase.  This is valuable if your terminal cannot display lowercase
         characters or displays special symbols in place of lowercase
         characters.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +         +                                            |
         | CASE      | |Mixedcase|                                            |
         |           | |Uppercase|                                            |
         |           | |Lowercase|                                            |
         |           | +         +                                            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Mixedcase allows CMS terminal output to be produced in mixed case.
                   This is the initial condition and the default parameter.
 
         Uppercase forces all CMS terminal output to be produced in uppercase.
                   All lowercase alphabetic characters are translated to
                   uppercase.
 
         Lowercase forces all CMS terminal output to be produced in lowercase.
                   All uppercase alphabetic characters are translated to
                   lowercase.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The CASE setting affects all CMS terminal output, including
              output from SCRIPT and XEDIT.  Terminal output from CP commands
              and the text of messages from other users are not affected,
              however.
 
          2.  The CASE command has no effect on terminal input.
 
          3.  The CASE command and the CMS SET OUTPUT command alter the same
              output translation table.  Issuing one can change or override the
              other.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSCAS070E "[name]" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSCAS109S Insufficient storage available to create the output
                    table.  RC=41
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     45
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                             CC (CMS Immediate Command)
 
         Use the CC (Current command Cost) to display the cost and resources
         used by the currently executing CMS command or program.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CC        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  CC displays the cost, CPU time, and I/O count used since the
              currently executing command or program started.  The output is
              displayed with the CP MESSAGE command, so it is suppressed by the
              CP SET MSG OFF command.
 
          2.  CMS immediate commands are accepted only from the terminal.  They
              cannot be issued from an EXEC.
 
          3.  The SET IMMEDIATE command can be used to disable CMS immediate
              commands.  QUERY IMMEDIATE to determine the current setting.  The
              initial setting is SET IMMEDIATE ON.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     46
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       CHECKBUF
 
         Use the CHECKBUF command to determine the number of lines in the
         current CMS program stack buffer.  The return code is set to the
         number of lines.  Use the SENTRIES command to determine the total
         number of lines in all the program stack buffers.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CHECKBUF  |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Program stack buffers can be created with the MAKEBUF command and
              destroyed with the DROPBUF command.  Lines entered from your
              terminal are not placed in the program stack.
 
          2.  If there are no program stack buffers the return code is zero.
 
       |  3.  When CHECKBUF is executed in an EXEC with an &ERROR or SIGNAL ON
       |      ERROR trap in effect the error action is performed if the current
              program stack buffer contains one or more lines.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CHECKBUF produces no messages.  The return code is set to the number
         of lines in the current CMS program stack buffer.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     47
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        CJSPREP
 
         Use the CJSPREP command to convert a file in SUBMIT command INCLUDE V
         format to its original format.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CJSPREP   | ifileid ofileid  [(options... [)]]                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [REPlace]    [Counts]                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifileid   is the fileid of the input file.
 
         ofileid   is the fileid of the output file.
 
         Options
 
         REPlace   allows an existing file to be replaced.
 
         Counts    specifies that a count of the input and output records is to
                   be displayed at the completion of the command.
 
         Usage Notes
 
         The input file must contain fixed-length, eighty-byte records in the
         format produced by the SUBMIT command INCLUDE-V function.  The output
         file will always contain variable-length records.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSPRP001E No filename specified.  RC=24
         DMSPRP002E File not found.  RC=28
         DMSPRP003E "[string]" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSPRP007E File "[fn ft fm]" does not contain fixed, 80-byte records.
                    RC=32
         DMSPRP023E No filetype specified.  RC=24
         DMSPRP024E File "[fn ft fm]" already exists; specify "REPLACE".  RC=28
         DMSPRP056E Record [n] in file "[fn ft fm]" is not valid.  RC=32
         DMSPRP062E Invalid "*" in fileid.  RC=20
         DMSPRP070E "[string]" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSPRP104S Error "[code]" reading file "[fn ft fm]" from disk.  RC=100
         DMSPRP105S Error "[code]" writing file "[fn ft fm]" from disk.  RC=100
         DMSPRP932I [count] records read, [count] records written.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     48
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          CLEAR
 
         Use the CLEAR command to clear the screen of a display terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CLEAR     |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
         The CLEAR command is functional on all 3270-type terminals, 3066
         terminals, and ASCII terminals that will clear their screens when a
         Form Feed control character is received.  Some printing ASCII
         terminals will eject a page when a Form Feed is received.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CLEAR produces no messages or non-zero return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     49
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        CMSCMSG
 
         Use the CMSCMSG command to write a message in the command area of a
         3270-type display terminal.  CMSCMSG performs no function on any other
         type of terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CMSCMSG   | [text...]                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | text      is one or more words of data to be written.  When called
       |           from EXEC (not REXX or EXEC 2), the text will be tokenized
       |           and the eight-character tokens concatenated.   The text will
                   be truncated to a length of 130 characters.  If no text is
                   specified, a blank line is written.
 
         Usage Notes
 
         The text is written into the command (input) area at the bottom of the
         display screen.  This text may then be entered as a command.  The user
         may modify the text before pressing ENTER.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CMSCMSG produces no error messages or non-zero return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     50
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         CMSDIO
 
       | Use the CMSDIO command to perform CMS disk file operations from an
       | EXEC.  The EXECIO command provides most of the functions of CMSDIO.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +      +       +   +     +       +    ++++             |
         | CMSDIO    | |Read  | fn ft |fm |line |format |size|||| [([data...]]|
         |           | |Write |       |A1 |0    |V      |    ||||             |
         |           | |Point |       +   +     +       +    ++++             |
         |           | |RPoint|                                               |
         |           | |WPoint|                                               |
         |           | |Close |                                               |
         |           | |TRunc |                                               |
         |           | +      +                                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Read      reads a line from the file and puts it in the stack.
 
         Write     writes a line into the file.
 
         Point     sets the read and write pointers to the specified line.
 
         RPoint    sets the read pointer to the specified line.
 
         WPoint    sets the write pointer to the specified line.
 
         Close     closes the file.
 
         TRunc     truncates the file at the specified line.  All lines from
                   the line specified to the end of the file are deleted.
                   Truncating at line 1 erases the file.  The TRUNC function
                   cannot be used if the file is on an 800-byte block format
                   minidisk.
 
         fn        is the filename of the file to be accessed.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the file to be accessed.
 
         fm        is the filemode of the file to be accessed.  If unspecified,
                   "A1" is assumed.
 
         line      is a line number in the file.  The lines are numbered from 1
                   to n for a file with n lines.  An item number of 0 causes
                   the next sequential line to be read or written.  Reading
                   begins with line 1 unless a POINT or RPOINT has selected
                   another line.  For a new file, an item number of zero causes
                   line 1 to be written.  For existing files, the line is
                   written after the last existing line or after the last line
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     51
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         CMSDIO
 
                   selected with a POINT or WPOINT function.  Subsequent writes
                   using line 0 cause lines to be read or written sequentially
                   until a CLOSE, POINT, or WPOINT is issued.  The default line
                   number is 0.
 
         format    is the record format of the file.  It may be either "F" for
                   fixed-length or "V" for variable-length.  "V" is assumed for
                   new files.  The actual format is always used for existing
                   files.
 
         size      is the length of the line.  If unspecified, the default
                   value is the actual data length for variable-length records.
                   The default for fixed-length records is the actual record
       |           length of the file for existing files, or 255 for new files.
       |           The maximum value is 255.
 
         data      represents data to be written to the file (used only with
                   the WRITE function).  A blank line is written if the
                   parenthesis is present with no data.  If the parenthesis is
                   not present the data is read from the stack.  Data items on
       |           the command line are tokenized if CMSDIO is called from EXEC
       |           (but not REXX or EXEC 2).
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Rewriting a variable-length record with a longer line causes any
              following lines in the file to be discarded.
 
          2.  Data may be lost if a file is not closed after new lines have
              been written.
 
       |  3.  Lines read by CMSDIO are truncated to 255 bytes.  Lines lines
       |      written are limited by the command line (130 bytes) or stack
       |      width (about 500 bytes).
 
          4.  If an I/O error is encountered a special return code will be
              produced without a message.  The return codes and their meanings
              are:
 
                1001  File not found
                1002  Invalid buffer address
                1003  Permanent I/O error
                1004  First character of filemode is invalid
                1005  Number of lines to be read is less than or equal to
                      zero, or is greater than 32,768 for an 800-byte block
                      format disk, or filemode number is invalid (WRITE)
                1006  File not open (CLOSE), or line number too large
                1007  Invalid record format (READ), or attempt to skip
                      unwritten V-format item (WRITE)
                1008  Incorrect length or buffer size not specified
                1009  Read from a file open for output or write to a file open
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     52
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         CMSDIO
 
                      for input on an 800-byte block formatted disk
                1010  Maximum number of files reached
                1011  Number of lines greater than one for a V-format file
                      (READ), or record format not F or V (WRITE)
                1012  End of file, or line number greater than number of
                      lines in file
                1013  V-format line has an invalid displacement in active
                      file table (READ), or disk full (WRITE)
                1014  Invalid character in filename, or number of bytes to be
                      written not integrally divisible by the number of
                      lines to be written
                1015  Invalid character in filetype, or length of F-format
                      item not the same as the previous item (WRITE)
                1016  Record format specified does not match that of the file
                1019  Maximum number of data blocks reached
                1020  Invalid character in fileid
                1021  Invalid character in filetype
                1022  Virtual storage capacity exceeded
                1024  Invalid filemode
                1025  Insufficient free storage available for file
                      management control areas
                1026  Requested item number is negative or exceeds file
                      system capacity
                1036  Disk not accessed, or access is read-only (WRITE)
                1040  Error closing file
                1044  File system pointers invalid
                1050  Not an EDF disk
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSDIO001E No filename specified.  RC=24
         DMSDIO023E No filetype specified.  RC=24
         DMSDIO047E No function specified.  RC=24
         DMSDIO048E Invalid mode "[mode]".  RC=24
         DMSDIO070E "[string]" is not a parameter.  RC=24
 
         Refer to the Usage Notes for a description of the special I/O error
         return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     53
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        CMSPMSG
 
         Use the CMSPMSG command to write a prompt message on the terminal.  On
         terminals other than 3270-type displays the cursor or carriage will
         remain on the space following the message text.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CMSPMSG   | [text...]                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | text      is the text of the message.  The text is truncated to a
       |           length of 130 characters.  When called from an EXEC (but not
       |           REXX or EXEC 2) the text is tokenized.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CMSPMSG produces no error messages or non-zero return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     54
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        CMSREAD
 
         Use the CMSREAD command to read a line from the terminal or stack and
         place the data in the stack.  The input may be masked.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CMSREAD   | [Mask]                                                 |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Mask      specifies that the input is to be masked.  On 3270-type
                   terminals the entire input line is set to non-display mode.
                   On other types of terminals the first eight characters of
                   the line will be concealed by overstriking with a mask
                   string.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The input is limited to 130 characters from the terminal or 255
              characters from the program stack.  Lines read from the terminal
              are not translated to uppercase (when using EXEC 2, &CASE M will
              be needed to prevent translation to uppercase), but any CMS SET
              INPUT translations will be performed.  Lines read from the
              terminal are also subject to logical editing under the control of
              the CP TERMINAL and SET LINEDIT commands.
 
          2.  Lines entered when the MASK parameter is used will not be
              recorded on your console log and cannot be recalled or displayed
              with either the CP PF key function RETRIEVE or the CMS ?
              function.
 
          3.  You should not use a CMSREAD MASK command immediately following a
              CMSPMSG command unless you are using a 3270-type terminal.  On
              other kinds of terminals, the mask will overstrike part of the
              message.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSCRD070E "[string]" is not a parameter.  RC=24
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     55
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         CMSTIO
 
         Use the CMSTIO command to determine if a virtual device exists.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CMSTIO    | [address]                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         address   is the virtual device address of the device to be tested.
                   If omitted, the terminal will be tested.  The virtual
                   address is specified as a hexadecimal value.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         CMSTIO produces no messages.  It uses the following return codes:
 
           0   Device exists
           1   Invalid parameter
           3   Device doesn't exist
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     56
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   COBDC (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBDC command to compile a program with the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler using the TEST option.  The program then can be executed
         using COBOL Interactive Debug.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBDC     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "COBOL,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are COBOL compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The filename of the COBOL file should be the same as the name on
              the PROGRAM-ID line in the program.
 
          2.  COBDC is an EXEC that uses the COBOL command to compile a COBOL
              program.  The object program produced can be executed with the
              COBDG or COBVG command.  Refer to the descriptions of the COBOL
              and TESTCOB commands for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     57
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  COBDCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBDCG command to compile a program using the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler and then execute the program with COBOL Interactive Debug.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBDCG    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "COBOL,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are COBOL options.  The TEST option is supplied.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The filename of the COBOL file must be the same as the name on
              the PROGRAM-ID line in the program.
 
          2.  You must define any DD names that you use before issuing the
              COBDCG command.  For example:
 
                   FILEDEF SYSPRINT TERMINAL ( PERM
                   FILEDEF SYSOUT TERMINAL ( PERM
                   FILEDEF DATAFILE DISK DATA FILE A (PERM
                   COBDCG program
 
          3.  COBDCG is an EXEC that uses the COBOL command to compile a COBOL
              program.  The object program produced is then executed using
              COBOL Interactive Debug.  Refer to the descriptions of the COBOL
              and TESTCOB commands for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     58
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   COBDG (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBDG command to execute a program using COBOL Interactive
         DEBUG.  The program must have been compiled with the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler with the TEST option.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBDG     | filename                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   object program produced by the VS COBOL compiler.  The
                   filetype of the file must be "TEXT."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The filename of the TEXT file must be the same as the name on the
              PROGRAM-ID line in the source program.
 
          2.  You must define any DD names that you use before issuing the
              COBDG command.  For example:
 
                   FILEDEF SYSPRINT TERMINAL ( PERM
                   FILEDEF SYSOUT TERMINAL ( PERM
                   FILEDEF DATAFILE DISK DATA FILE A (PERM
                   COBDG program
 
          3.  Refer to the descriptions of the COBOL and TESTCOB commands for
              more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     59
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
         Use the COBOL command to compile a program with the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler.  The COBVCG, COBVC, COBVG, COBDCG, COBDC, and COBDG commands
         are available for use with VS COBOL programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CObol     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "COBOL,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         Options
 
         ACEn      is the same as SPACEn.
 
         ADV       specifies that records for files with WRITE...ADVANCING need
                   not reserve the first byte for the control character.  This
                   is the default.
 
         APOst     specifies that apostrophes are used to delimit literals.
                   The default is QUOTE.
 
         BATch     specifies that the source file contains multiple programs or
                   subprograms.  The default is NOBATCH.
 
         BUF n     is the amount of storage used for buffers during
                   compilation.  The default is (SIZE-96K)/4+4K if SIZE is
                   specified, 4K otherwise.
 
         CDEck     causes COPY statements to be expanded in the reformatted
                   deck produced with the FDECK option.  The default is
                   NOCDECK.
 
         CLIst     produces a condensed listing of the generated object code.
                   The default is NOCLIST.
 
         CNT n     is the same as LINECNT.
 
         COUnt     causes code to be generated to produce verb execution
                   summaries at the end of program execution.  This output is
                   directed to SYSCOUNT.  The default is NOCOUNT.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     60
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
         CSYNtax   suppresses object code generation if E-level or higher
                   messages are produced during compilation.  The default is
                   NOCSYNTAX, which allows compilation to complete with errors.
 
         DECk      sends the object program to the spooled punch.  The default
                   is NODECK.
 
         DIsk      writes the program listing to a disk file named "filename
                   LISTING."  This is the default.
 
         DMAp      lists the glossary, global tables, literal pools, and
                   register assignments.  NODMAP is the default.
 
         DUMp      causes an abnormal termination when a disaster situation
                   occurs.  NODUMP is the default.
 
         DYNam     causes subprograms to be dynamically loaded when called,
                   rather than statically loaded when the main program is
                   loaded.  NODYNAM is the default.
 
         ENDjob    causes clean-up to be done when a GOBACK is executed in a
                   main program, or when a STOP RUN is executed in any program.
                   NOENDJOB is the default.
 
         FDEck     sends a reformatted listing to SYSPUNCH.  FDECK is used with
                   the LSTONLY or LSTCOMP options.  NOFDECK is the default.
 
         FLAGE     suppresses compiler warning messages.  FLAGW is the default.
 
         FLAGW     allows all compiler warning and error messages to be listed.
                   This is the default.
 
         FLOw n    causes a formatted trace of "n" procedures to be listed if
                   an abnormal termination occurs.  NOFLOW is the default.
 
         LAG       is the same as FLAGE.
 
         LAGW      is the same as FLAGW.
 
         LANGLVL n specifies the COBOL dialect used by the compiler.  LANGLVL 2
                   (the default) is ANS X3.23-1974; LANGLVL 1 is the older ANS
                   X3.23-1968 standard.  Both dialects include IBM extensions.
 
         LCOLn     controls the reformatted Procedure Division listing.  LCOL1
                   causes single-column output; LCOL2 causes double-column
                   output.  LCOL2 is the default.
 
         LIB       allows COPY and BASIS statements to be used.  NOLIB is the
                   default.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     61
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
         LINECNT n is the number of lines on each page of compiler listing
                   output (ranging from 1 to 99).  The default is LINECNT 60.
 
         LOAd      writes the object program to a disk file named "filename
                   TEXT."  This is the default.
 
         LSTComp   causes the lister to be used and the source program to be
                   compiled.  NOLST is the default.
 
         LSTOnly   causes the lister to be used, but the program is not
                   compiled.  NOLST is the default.
 
         LVLx      specifies how deviations from ANS COBOL are to be flagged.
                   FIPS levels A, B, C, or D may be specified.  NOLVL is the
                   default.
 
         L120      specifies that the reformatted listing will have 120
                   characters per line.
 
         L132      specifies that the reformatted listing will have 132
                   characters per line.  This is the default.
 
         NAMe      causes NAME records to be included in the generated TEXT
                   file.  NONAME is the default.
 
         NOADV     See the ADV option.
 
         NOLOAd    See the LOAD option.
 
         NOPRInt   suppresses listing output.  See the DISK and PRINT options.
 
         NOSEQ     See the SEQ option.
 
         NOSOUrce  See the SOURCE option.
 
         NOTERm    See the TERM option.
 
         NOVERB    See the VERB option.
 
         NOZWB     See the ZWB option.
 
         NUM       causes line numbers on the input records to be used.  NONUM
                   is the default.
 
         OLn       is the same as LCOLn.
 
         OPTimize  causes optimized code to be generated.  OPTIMIZE is implied
                   by the SYMDMP option.  NOOPT is the default.
 
         OSDeck    specifies that the object program will be executed under OS,
                   or is a subprogram for OS or CMS.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     62
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
         PMAp      lists the global tables, literal pools, register
                   assignments, and assembler language expansion of the source
                   program.  NOPMAP is the default.
 
         PRInt     sends the compiler listing to the spooled printer.  DISK is
                   the default.
 
         QUOte     specifies that double quotes will be used to delimit
                   literals.  This is the default.
 
         RESident  causes the COBOL Library Management feature to dynamically
                   load at execution time.  NORES is the default.
 
         SEQ       causes the compiler to check the sequence of the source
                   statements.  This is the default.
 
         SIZE n    indicates the amount of storage available to the compiler
                   (from 128K to 9999999).  The default is 128K.  See also the
                   BUF option.
 
         SOUrce    produces a source listing.  This is the default.
 
         SPACEn    specifies single, double, or triple spacing in the source
                   listing.  The default is SPACE1 (single spacing).
 
         STAte     causes the statement number and verb executing at the time
                   of an abnormal failure to be listed.  NOSTATE is the
                   default.
 
         SUPmap    suppresses object listing and generation if an E-level or D-
                   level message is produced.  NOSUPMAP is the default.
 
         SXRef     produces a sorted cross-reference listing.  NOSXREF is the
                   default.
 
         SYMdmp    causes a formatted dump of the data area to be produced if
                   the program terminates abnormally.  SYMDMP implies the
                   OPTIMIZE option.  NOSYMDMP is the default.
 
         SYNtax    causes the syntax of the source program to be checked, but
                   not compiled.  NOSYNTAX, the default, specifies syntax
                   checking and compilation.
 
         SYSx      causes SYSOUx to be used for debugging and DISPLAY output.
                   The default is SYST, which causes SYSOUT to be used.  An
                   appropriate FILEDEF must be issued before execution for
                   names other than SYSOUT.
 
         TERm      displays compiler statistics and messages at the terminal.
                   This is the default.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     63
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
         TEST      is used with COBOL Interactive Debug (TESTCOB).  NOTEST is
                   the default.
 
         TRUnc     causes computational (binary) items to use the PICTURE
                   clause specification when moved.  NOTRUNC is the default.
 
         VBRef     produces a cross-reference of verbs.  NOVBREF is the
                   default.
 
         VBSum     produces a summary of the verbs used in the program.
                   NOVBSUM is the default.
 
         VERB      includes the names of procedures and verbs in the object
                   program listing.  This option is significant only if CLIST
                   or PMAP is specified.
 
         XREf      produces an unsorted cross-reference.  The default is
                   NOXREF.
 
         ZWB       causes the compiler to generate code to strip the sign from
                   a signed external decimal field when it is compared to an
                   alphanumeric field.  This is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  More information about VS COBOL can be found in the IBM VM/370
              CMS User's Guide for COBOL.  The VS COBOL compiler and language
              are documented in IBM VS COBOL for OS/VS and the IBM OS/VS COBOL
              Compiler and Library Programmer's Guide.  COBOL Interactive Debug
              is described in IBM OS COBOL Interactive Debug Terminal User's
              Guide and Reference.
 
          2.  If you use COPY statements in your COBOL program, you must define
              the libraries to be searched before you issue the COBOL command.
              Members to be copied may be in CMS MACLIB's or OS partitioned
              data sets (or both).  To use a CMS MACLIB, use the following
              commands:
 
                   GLOBAL MACLIB libname
                   FILEDEF SYSLIB DISK libname MACLIB *
 
              To use an OS PDS, issue the following commands:
 
                   OSDISK
                   FILEDEF SYSLIB DISK SYSLIB MACLIB * DSN data.set.name
                   GLOBAL MACLIB SYSLIB
                   COBOL filename
 
              Refer to the description of the GLOBAL and MACLIB commands for
              more information.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     64
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          COBOL
 
          3.  Before loading your COBOL program, you must define any subroutine
              libraries required (including the VS COBOL libraries).  For
              example:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB PTF8LIB COBOLVS
                   LOAD filename ( START
 
              If your program performs any input or output operations you must
              use FILEDEF commands to define the files or devices to be used
              before execution.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     65
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   COBVC (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBVC command to compile a program with the IBM VS COBOL
         compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBVC     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "COBOL,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are COBOL compiler options.
 
         Usage Note
 
         COBVC is an EXEC that uses the COBOL command to compile a COBOL
         program.  The object program produced can be executed with the COBVG
         command.  Refer to the description of the COBOL command for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     66
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  COBVCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBVCG command to compile and execute a program using the IBM
         VS COBOL compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBVCG    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the COBOL
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "COBOL,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are COBOL compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default VS COBOL subroutine libraries are used: PTF8LIB and
              COBLIBVS.  If you need to use additional libraries or load
              additional object files you must use the COBVG command to execute
              your program.
 
          2.  COBVCG is an EXEC that uses the COBOL command to compile a COBOL
              program.  The object program produced is then executed.  Refer to
              the description of the COBOL command for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     67
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   COBVG (EXEC)
 
         Use the COBVG command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the IBM VS COBOL compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COBVG     | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the VS
                   COBOL (or VS COBOL compatible) object programs.  The
                   filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  PTF8LIB and COBLIBVS.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the COBVC and COBOL commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     68
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       CODETRAN
 
         Use the CODETRAN command to perform character code and case
         conversions on CMS disk files.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | CODETRAN  | ifileid [ofileid] [( options ... [)]]                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +       +   +       +                                  |
         |           | |ATOE   |   |NEWFile|                                  |
         |           | |ETOA   |   |REPlace|                                  |
         |           | |LOwcase|   +       +                                  |
         |           | |UPcase |                                              |
         |           | |USer fn|                                              |
         |           | +       +                                              |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifileid   is the file identifier (filename, filetype, and filemode) of
                   the input file.  The filemode may be specified as "*," or
                   may be omitted if the output file identifier is not
                   specified.  The default is "*."
 
         ofileid   is the file identifier (filename, filetype, and filemode) of
                   the output file.  An equal sign (=) may be coded for any of
                   the output file identifier fields.  If unspecified, the
                   default is "= = =," which causes the input file to be
                   replaced.
 
         Options
 
         ATOE      converts from ASCII to EBCDIC.
 
         ETOA      converts from EBCDIC to ASCII.
 
         LOwcase   converts EBCDIC uppercase to EBCDIC lowercase.
 
         NEWFile   specifies that the output file must not exist prior to the
                   execution of the command.  This is the default unless the
                   output file is the same as the input file.
 
         REPlace   causes the output file to be replaced if it already exists.
                   This is the default if the output file is the same as the
                   input file.
 
         UPcase    converts EBCDIC lowercase to EBCDIC uppercase.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     69
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       CODETRAN
 
         USer fn   causes translation to use a table in the specified CMS disk
                   file.  The filetype of the file must be "CODETRAN" and the
                   file must contain at least 16 records of 32 characters.  A
                   translation table consists of 256 hexadecimal values (00
                   through FF).
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  A few characters do not translate properly when going back and
              forth between ASCII and EBCDIC.  Refer to the Appendix on
              character sets for more information.
 
          2.  The following files are available as guides for making your own
              translation tables:
 
                   ATOE    CODETRAN Y2  (ASCII to EBCDIC)
                   ETOA    CODETRAN Y2  (EBCDIC to ASCII)
                   LOWCASE CODETRAN Y2  (EBCDIC lowercase to EBCDIC uppercase)
                   UPCASE  CODETRAN Y2  (EBCDIC uppercase to EBCDIC lowercase)
                   NONE    CODETRAN Y2  (Each character to itself, no change)
 
          3.  With an appropriate pair of translation tables, CODETRAN could be
              used as part of a simple substitution-type cipher system.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSCOD002E Input file "file" not found.  RC=28
         DMSCOD003E "string" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSCOD007E Insufficient storage to initialize i/o buffer.  RC=28
         DMSCOD024E File "file" already exists, specify "replace".  RC=28
         DMSCOD042E No fileid(s) specified.  RC=24
         DMSCOD044E Record length incorrect in "file".  RC=32
         DMSCOD048E Invalid mode "mode".  RC=24
         DMSCOD054E Incomplete fileid.  RC=24
         DMSCOD062E Invalid "*" in fileid.  RC=20
         DMSCOD062E Invalid character in fileid "file".  RC=20
         DMSCOD069E Disk mode "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSCOD070E "string" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSCOD104S Error n reading file "file".  RC=100
         DMSCOD105S Error n writing file "file".  RC=100
         DMSCOD106E Output disk not accessed r/w.  RC=100
         DMSCOD930E Invalid character in user translate record.  RC=4
         DMSCOD931E Multiple translate options specified.  RC=4
         DMSCOD932E No translate option specified.  RC=12
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     70
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       COPYFILE
 
         Use the COPYFILE command to make a copy of a CMS disk file.  Use the
         FCOPY command to copy one or more files if the only options required
         are TYPE or OLDDATE.  FCOPY is as much as ten times faster (and
         cheaper) than COPYFILE.  This is a summary of the most frequently
         needed options and functions of the COPYFILE command, not a complete
         description.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | COPYFILE  | ifileid  [ofileid]  [( [options...] [)]]               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                    +       +  +      +  +       +      |
         |           | [Type]  [OLDDate]  |APPend |  |PACK  |  |RECfm V|      |
         |           |                    |REPlace|  |UNPACK|  |      F|      |
         |           | [TRUnc]            +       +  +      +  +       +      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifileid   is the filename, filetype, and filemode of the input file.
                   Any part of the fileid may be specified as "*" to indicate a
                   group of files matching the other parts of the fileid.
 
         ofileid   is the filename, filetype, and filemode of the output file.
                   If any part of "ifileid" contains an "*", the corresponding
                   part of "ofileid" must be specified as "=".  The default
                   output fileid is "= = =".
 
         Options
 
         APPend    adds the input file to the end of an existing output file.
                   A new file is created it does'n exist.
 
         OLDDate   uses the date of the input file for the output file.  The
                   date may be examined with the FLIST, LISTX or LISTFILE
                   "DATE" option, and is used with the sorting options of
                   FLIST, LISTX, LISTFILE, and FILELIST.
 
         PACK      writes the output file in packed format.  Refer to the PACK
                   command description for more information.
 
         RECfm x   specifies the record format of the output file.  RECFM may
                   be specified as "V" (variable-length records) or "F" (fixed-
                   length records).  The default is the format of the input
                   file.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     71
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       COPYFILE
 
         REPlace   replaces an existing file with the output file.  This is the
                   default if the output fileid is "= = =" (the default value).
 
         TRUnc     is used when converting files to variable-length format.  It
                   removes trailing blanks from output lines.
 
         Type      displays the fileid of each file copied.
 
         UNPACK    writes the output file in normal, unpacked format.  The
                   input file must be in packed format.  Refer to the UNPACK
                   command description for more information.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  COPYFILE can be used to convert a file in fixed-length record
              format to variable-length format.  This often results in a
              considerable savings of disk space.  To perform this procedure,
              use the following command:
 
                 copyfile filename filetype filemode ( RECFM V TRUNC OLDDATE
 
              Warning: Do not perform this procedure on a file in packed
              format.  Packed files must be in fixed-length format.
 
          2.  COPYFILE has many other options and capabilities, including a
              SPECS option that can be used to manipulate the data in specified
              columns as the file is copied.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command
              and Macro Reference or the online HELP command for details.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     72
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           COST
 
         Use the COST command to obtain the cost of a terminal session.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |            +     +                                     |
         | COST      | [(  [Type] |Stack| [Nohdr]  [)]]                       |
         |           |            |Lifo |                                     |
         |           |            |Fifo |                                     |
         |           |            +     +                                     |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Options
 
         Type      displays the cost on the terminal.  This is the default.
 
         Stack     puts the cost in the stack (last-in, first-out).
 
         Lifo      is the same as STACK.
 
         Fifo      puts the cost in the stack (first-in, first-out).
 
         Nohdr     suppresses the typed header line.
 
         Usage Notes
 
       |  1.  COST displays the total charge for the terminal session during
       |      the current rate period.  Also displayed are the CPU time and the
       |      I/O operation count.  The header line contains the elapsed time
       |      of this terminal session during the current rate period.
 
          2.  The stacking options of COST (STACK, LIFO, and FIFO) put a single
              line containing the following data on the program stack:
 
              1. An asterisk (*)
              2. Cost (dollars)
              3. Cost (cents)
              4. Four-digit department number
              5. Five-digit project number
              6. Milliseconds of CPU time used
              7. Count of I/O operations (only non-spooled disk
                 operations are counted
       |      8. Elapsed time (hours:minutes:seconds)
       |      9. Cost (dollars and cents)
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
       | DMSCST003E "[string]" is not an option.  RC=24
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     73
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                        DEFAULTS (EXEC)
 
         Use the DEFAULTS command to customize the default options for the
         commands listed below.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                      +                               |
         | DEFAULTS  | |Set command options...|                               |
         |           | |List [command]        |                               |
         |           | +                      +                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Set       sets default options for the specified command.
 
         List      lists the current default options for the specified command
                   or for all commands supported by DEFAULTS (if no command is
                   specified).
 
         Supported Commands and Options
 
         Command    Options
         Filelist   Profile [fn|PROFFLST]  Filelist
                                           NOFilelist
         Note       Profile [fn|PROFNOTE]  Short  LOG    NOAck
                                           LONg   NOLog  Ack
                    NOTebook [fn|ALL|*]
                    NONOTebook
         Peek       Profile [fn|PROFPEEK]  FRom recno  FOr numrec
         RDrlist    Profile [fn|PROFRLST]
         Receive    Log    Olddate  NOTebook [fn|ALL|*]
                    NOLog  NEwdate
         Sendfile   New  NOType  NOFilelist  Log    NOAck
                    Old  Type    Filelist    NOLog  Ack
         TDISK      SIZE [nK|nM|200K]
         Tell       MSGCMD [MSG|SMSG]
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference or online HELP for
         more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     74
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                    DROP (EXEC)
 
         Use the DROP command to drop a link to a minidisk.  (DROP combines the
         RELEASE and DETACH commands.)  After dropping a link it is necessary
         to use the LINK and ACCESS commands to make the files on the dropped
         minidisk accessible again.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | DROP      | disk [disk...]                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         disk      is a filemode letter or a virtual device address.  More than
                   one can be specified.  Filemode letters are assigned with
                   the ACCESS command, and virtual device addresses are
                   assigned with the LINK command.  You cannot drop "190,"
                   "19E," "S," or "Y."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  It is possible to drop your own A-disk, D-disk, and links to the
              OS rental volumes.  This doesn't destroy any files, but it makes
              them temporarily inaccessible.  The following commands would re-
              establish your A-disk:
 
                   link * 191 191
                   access 191 a
 
              You can also log off and log on again to re-establish your normal
              links.
 
       |  2.  You must DROP a disk that you have write-access to if you want to
       |      allow another user to write on that disk.  Refer to the
       |      descriptions of the AUTOLINK, LINK, and ACCESS commands for more
       |      information.
 
       |  3.  If you DROP a temporary disk (TDISK), DROP attempts to estimate
       |      the charge for the disk space.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSDRP070E No devices specified.
         DMSDRP070E "disk" cannot be dropped.
         DMSDRP070E "disk" is not a valid mode or address.
         DMSDRP113S Device "disk" does not exist.
 
         Messages may also be produced by the RELEASE and DETACH commands.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     75
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        DROPBUF
 
         Use the DROPBUF command to destroy the most recently created CMS
         program stack buffer or buffers.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | DROPBUF   | [n]                                                    |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         n         is the number of the first buffer to be dropped.  All
                   buffers created after the specified buffer will also be
                   dropped (these will have higher numbers).  If "n" is not
                   specified, the most recently created buffer is dropped.
 
         Usage Note
 
         The CHECKBUF, MAKEBUF, and SENTRIES commands are also useful when
         manipulating the stack.  All of these commands are intended to be used
         from EXEC's.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DROPBUF produces no messages, but can produce the following return
         codes:
 
           1  The buffer number was not valid.
           2  The specified buffer does not exist.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     76
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        ENVIRON
 
         The ENVIRON command provides information about the CMS environment by
         setting a return code.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +          +                                           |
         |           | |BATch     |                                           |
         | ENVIRON   | |DISConnect|                                           |
         |           | |DISPlay   |                                           |
         |           | |SUBset    |                                           |
         |           | |system    |                                           |
         |           | +          +                                           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | BATch     checks for the CMS Batch environment.
 
         DISConne  checks for disconnected terminal status.  This is the
                   default.
 
         DISPlay   checks for a display (3270-type) terminal.
 
         SUBset    checks for CMS SUBSET mode.
 
       | system    checks the IPL system name or device address.  This usually
                   will be "CMS."
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         ENVIRON will check for the specified condition and set the return code
         to zero if true, one if false.  For example, issuing ENVIRON DISPLAY
         while you are using a 3270-type terminal will return a zero.  Issuing
         ENVIRON DISC from a 3270-type terminal will return a one.
 
         ENVIRON produces no messages.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     77
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          ERASE
 
         Use the ERASE command to delete a CMS disk file.  This is a
         description of the most frequently used function of the ERASE command;
         other functions are available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                   +        +                           |
         | ERASE     | filename filetype |filemode| [( [TYPE] [)]]            |
         |           |                   |A       |                           |
         |           |                   +        +                           |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of a CMS disk file to be erased.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file.  The default is "A."
 
         Options
 
         TYPE      types the fileid of each erased file.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The BURN command also provides this function.
 
          2.  ERASE has other options and capabilities.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS
              Command and Macro Reference or online HELP for details.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     78
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           EXEC
 
         Use the EXEC command to execute commands and control statements
       | contained in the specified CMS disk file.  The filetype of the file
       | must be "EXEC."  If the first line of the program contains a comment
       | beginning with "/*" it is processed by REXX; if it contains an
       | "&TRACE" control statement it is processed by EXEC 2; otherwise EXEC
       | is used.  REXX is recommended for new applications.
 
       | For more detailed information about REXX (the Restructured Extended
       | Executor), consult the VM/SP System Product Interpreter Reference and
       | the VM/SP System Product Interpreter User's Guide.
 
       | For more detailed information about EXEC 2, consult the VM/SP EXEC 2
       | Reference.
 
       | For more information about EXEC, consult the VM/SP CMS Command and
       | Macro Reference.
 
       | Online information is available for all three EXEC languages; enter:
 
       |      help rexx   -or-   help exec2   -or-   help exec
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | [EXec]    | filename [arguments...]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename    is the name of the EXEC.
 
         arguments   are arguments passed to the EXEC.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Any command issued from the terminal ordinarily is assumed to be
              the name of an EXEC.  This is controlled by the CMS command SET
              IMPEX (implied EXEC); SET IMPEX OFF to disable the automatic EXEC
              search.  If no EXEC exists a search is made for a module or CMS
              nucleus command.  If neither is found, the command is passed to
              CP for execution.  This is controlled with the CMS command SET
              IMPCP (implied CP); SET IMPCP OFF to disable this process.
 
              When issuing commands from within XEDIT, XEDIT will first assume
              that the command is an XEDIT subcommand.  If this is not the case
              a check for an XEDIT macro is made (this is under the control of
              the XEDIT subcommand SET MACRO).  If no macro is found, the
              command is passed through the normal CMS command search (under
              the control of the XEDIT subcommand SET IMPCMSCP).
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     79
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           EXEC
 
              Both CMS and XEDIT have facilities for user-defined command
              synonyms and abbreviations.  For more information, refer to the
              description of the CMS command SYNONYM in the VM/SP CMS Command
              and Macro Reference, and to the description of the XEDIT
              subcommand SET SYNONYM in this manual.
 
       |  2.  REXX supports the full CMS command search (refer to the REXX
       |      ADDRESS function for more information).  This is not true of
       |      EXEC 2 and EXEC, however.  To execute another EXEC program from
       |      one of these languages use the "EXEC" command.  For example, to
       |      execute an EXEC named "SAMPLE" from one named "TEST," the TEST
              EXEC would contain the line "EXEC SAMPLE."  Similarly, to execute
              a CP command from within an EXEC, it must be preceded by the
              command "CP" ("CP LINK...," for example).
 
          3.  Two special EXEC programs are used by CMS at IPL (which occurs
              automatically when you log on).  A system profile EXEC is
              executed, and it calls a user-supplied EXEC named "PROFILE EXEC."
              You can use this EXEC to tailor the CMS environment to your own
              requirements.  The following example illustrates some of the
              things that you might use in a PROFILE:
 
       |           /* A Sample Profile EXEC */
       |           "set emsg on"
       |           "setcon to *"
 
              See the UKCC CMS User's Guide for more information about the
              PROFILE EXEC.
 
       |  4.  REXX and EXEC 2 also process XEDIT macros.  An XEDIT macro is
       |      similar to an EXEC and may contain XEDIT subcommands in addition
              to the other functions allowed in an EXEC.  All XEDIT macros have
              a filetype of "XEDIT" and may only be used from within XEDIT.
              Refer to the XEDIT command Usage Notes for more information.
 
       |  5.  Use the HI (Halt Interpretation) command to stop all currently
       |      executing REXX and EXEC 2 programs and macros.  HI halts
       |      execution without destroying the environment as HX does.
 
          6.  Contrary to the IBM-supplied documentation, the predefined EXEC 2
              variables &DATE and &TIME return the local date and time in
              Lexington, Kentucky, rather than the true date and time "on the
              primary meridian, Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)."  This would be the
              Mean Solar Time at Greenwich, which is roughly equivalent to
       |      standard Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).  The REXX DATE and
       |      TIME functions also return the local date and time in Lexington.
 
              Lexington local time is either Eastern Standard Time (EST) or
              Eastern Daylight Time (EDT).  EST is five hours earlier than GMT,
              and EDT is six hours earlier than GMT.  The time is usually
              correct to within a few minutes.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     80
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 EXPLAIN (EXEC)
 
         Use the EXPLAIN command to display an explanation of the most recently
         issued error message.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | EXPLAIN   |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Note
 
         EXPLAIN can properly handle all CMS error messages (DMS prefix), and
         all CP error messages (DMK prefix) resulting from CP commands entered
         from CMS.  It will not work for CP informational and warning messages,
         or CP messages resulting from commands issued from CP mode, or with a
         #CP.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Messages may be generated by the CMS HELP command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     81
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FCOPY
 
         Use the FCOPY command to copy CMS disk files.  FCOPY is considerably
         more efficient than COPYFILE, but does not allow packing, unpacking,
         or other file manipulations during the copy.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FCOPY     | ifileid ofileid [ (options... [)]]                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +      +  +       +  +        +                        |
         |           | |Type  |  |NEWDate|  |UPdirt  |                        |
         |           | |NOType|  |OLDDate|  |NOUPdirt|                        |
         |           | +      +  +       +  +        +                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifileid   is the fileid of the input file.  Patterns may be specified
                   using asterisks in the fileid (as with the LISTFILE
                   command).
 
         ofileid   is the fileid of the output file or files.  Equal signs must
                   be used for the filename, filetype, or filemode if the
                   corresponding part of the input fileid contains an asterisk.
 
         Options
 
         Type      displays the fileids of the copied files.  This is the
                   default if any part of the input fileid contains an
                   asterisk.
 
         NOType    suppresses the fileid list.
 
         NEWDate   uses the current date as the creation date of the output
                   file or files.  This is the default.
 
         OLDDate   uses the creation date of the input file or files as the
                   creation date of the output file or files.
 
         UPdirt    uses normal file directory updating during the copy.  This
                   is the default.
 
         NOUPdirt  causes file directory updating to be bypassed until all
                   files have been copied.  This is much faster than the
                   default mode if many files are to be copied.  The NOUPDIRT
                   option is overridden when an existing file is replaced.
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     82
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FCOPY
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Unlike the COPYFILE command, FCOPY will always replace an
              existing output file.  FCOPY does not have a NOREPLACE or NEWFILE
              option.  Use care to avoid unintentionally destroying existing
              files.
 
          2.  You should always use FCOPY instead of COPYFILE when you do not
              need the functions that only COPYFILE provides.  FCOPY is as much
              as ten times faster (and cheaper) than COPYFILE.
 
         Messages and return codes
 
         DMSCPY002E Files not found.  RC=28
         DMSCPY003E "name" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSCPY030E File "fileid" was active. it has been closed.
         DMSCPY032E Invalid filename or filetype.  RC=24
         DMSCPY037E Disk "mode" is read-only.  RC=32
         DMSCPY048E Invalid mode "mode".  RC=24
         DMSCPY054E Incomplete fileid specified.  RC=24
         DMSCPY062E Invalid "char" in fileid.  RC=20
         DMSCPY069E Disk "mode" is not accessed.  RC=32
         DMSCPY070E "name" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
         DMSCPY104S Error n reading file "fileid" from disk.  RC=100
         DMSCPY105S Error n writing file "fileid" to disk.  RC=100
         DMSCPY703I File "fileid" copied.
         DMSCPY985E Insufficient storage for fcopy.  RC=25
         DMSCPY993E [record|block] count for file "fileid" is too large
                    For disk mode.  RC=100
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     83
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
         Use the FLIST command to view a list of selected CMS disk files on a
         3270-type terminal.  FLIST creates a menu display that may be used to
         issue any CP or CMS command or EXEC (BURN or XEDIT, for example) by
         entering the command in the input area immediately to the right of a
         fileid on the screen.  You can also issue FLIST subcommands to sort
         the displayed data  or to enter a new FLIST level that displays
         another set of files.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +    +    +  +++                                       |
         | Flist     | |fn  |ft  |fm|||   [( [options...] [)]]                |
         |           | |*   |*   |A |||                                       |
         |           | +    +    +  +++                                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Help fn]  [Menu]  [Profile ([fn [ft [fm]]])]          |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Noclear]  [Stack]  [One [(recno)]]                    |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [PROTect]  [SOrt fn]  [Use [([fn [ft [fm [)]]]]]]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename or general form of the filename of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.  The default is
                   "*".
 
         ft        is the filetype or general form of the filetype of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.  The default is
                   "*".
 
         fm        is the filemode or general form of the filemode of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.  The default value
                   is "A".
 
         General Forms for File Identifiers
 
         Portions of file identifiers (name, type, and mode) may use asterisks
         (*) and plus signs (+) either alone or combined with other characters
         for matching purposes.  Each asterisk will match any number of any
         character.  Each plus sign will match a single occurrence of any
         character.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     84
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
         Options
 
         Help fn   specifies the name of an EXEC to be called by the /HELP
                   subcommand.  The default name is "HFLIST".
 
         Profile (fn ft fm)
                   specifies an alternate file to be used as the FLIST profile.
                   The default is "FLIST $PROFILE *".
 
         Noclear   specifies that FLIST is not to clear the screen.
 
         Stack     stacks one line for each input area used:
 
                   *FLIST nnnnn filename filetype filemode input
                     |      |     |        |        |        |
                     |      |     |        |        |        user input
                     |      |     |        |        the displayed filemode
                     |      |     |        the displayed filetype
                     |      |     the displayed filename
                     |      the file (entry) number in the list
                     to make it a comment, in case CMS reads it
 
         One (recno)
                   causes the first selected input line to be stacked.  If
                   "recno" is specified, display starts at recno.  The ONE
                   option implies the STACK option.
 
         SOrt fn   specifies an alternate EXEC to be called when a subcommand
                   (/Sx) is issued and the "USE" option was specified.  The
                   default name is "FLISTS".
 
         PROTect   allows input fields to be used only once, after which they
                   are protected to prevent entry of another command.
 
         Use (fn ft fm)
                   specifies display of the named file (which must be in CMS
                   EXEC format) rather than FLIST's file listing.  If no fileid
                   is specified, "CMS EXEC *" is used.  The data from file
                   columns 8-27 is placed in screen columns 1-19.  The
                   remainder of the data columns are placed in the appropriate
                   columns of the display following the user input areas.  This
                   means that the LISTX DATE or LABEL options should be used
                   when the input file is created.
 
         Menu      is used with the USE option to prevent formatting of the
                   screen to the right of the input areas.  When MENU is
                   specified, the text from input file columns 8-27 is placed
                   in screen columns 1-19, and text from file columns 29-64 is
                   moved intact to the right of the input areas.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     85
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
         Keyboard Functions
 
         PA1       will transfer control to CP mode.  Enter BEGIN to return to
                   FLIST.
 
         PA2       will transfer control to CMS subset.  Enter RETURN to return
                   to FLIST.
 
         PFnn      will execute the command defined for the Program Function
                   key pressed.  The PF key definitions are contained in the
                   FLIST profile.
 
         FLIST Subcommands
 
         The following subcommands are available after you enter the FLIST
         environment (abbreviations are shown in uppercase):
 
         /Bottom   displays the last page of the current FLIST level.
 
         /Cancel   cancels all active FLIST levels without processing any other
                   commands that are entered after the /CANCEL command.
 
         /Dspf     displays the PF key definitions.
 
         /Enter fn ft fm (options)
                   enters another FLIST level.  This is the same as the /LEVEL
                   subcommand.
 
         /Help     displays information on the use of the FLIST facility.
 
         /Level fn ft fm (options)
                   enters another FLIST level.  The /LEVEL subcommand operands
                   are the same as those used for the FLIST command.  If no
                   parameters are specified, the next logical level will
                   replace the level from which the command was entered.  If a
                   new level is required, at least a filename should be
                   specified.  When creating the second level, the screen will
                   be split into two equal parts.  Use the SPL PF key function
                   to move the split.  The profile is only processed on
                   initialization of the first level.
 
         /Omit command
                   is used to issue a CP or CMS command without appending the
                   fileid to the command.  /, /N, /T, and /M may be used within
                   the command to insert all or part of the fileid.
 
         /Quit     ends the current FLIST level after processing commands
                   entered for the level.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     86
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
       | /Refresh  builds a new file display, removing lines for deleted files
       |           and adding lines for new files.
 
         /Sx       sorts the entries in the current level.  The sort code "x"
                   specifies how the sorting is to be done.  After sorting, the
                   level is redisplayed from the top.  If any files have been
                   erased, the empty lines are removed during the sort.  The
                   following sorts are supported:
 
                        Code Sort
       |                 B   Block Count and Fileid (same as S)
                         D   Date, Time, and Fileid (descending date and time)
                         L   Record Length (descending order) and Fileid
                         M   Filemode, Filename, and Filetype
                         N   Filename, Filetype, and Filemode
       |                 S   File Size (descending order) and Fileid
                         T   Filetype, Filename, and Filemode
 
         /Top      displays the first (top) page for the current level.
 
         /n        positions the indicated line on the top line of the current
                   level.  If "n" is not specified, the line on which the
                   command is entered becomes the top line.
 
         =         repeats the last command for the current level.  Except for
                   /ENTER, /LEVEL, and /OMIT, FLIST subcommands cannot be
                   repeated.
 
         ?         displays the last command for the current level (what would
                   execute if = were entered).  Press ENTER or a PF key to re-
                   execute the displayed command.  This command can be used
                   from a PF key to provide a convenient command recall
                   function.
 
         The FLIST Profile
 
         At initialization, a search is made for the FLIST profile.  The
         profile is a CMS file named "FLIST $PROFILE *" (or a specified
         substitute) that is used to set PF key functions and override the
         default top and bottom titles.  The file may contain either fixed or
         variable-length records up to 132 bytes long.  After processing the
         profile, any lines in the CMS stack will be processed as profile
         records.
 
         The profile may contain any of the following records:
 
         *HEADER header-text
                   The first 50 characters following *HEADER will replace the
                   level title line.  The text will be centered.
 
         *PFKEYS nn [(btd)] function
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     87
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
                   PF key "nn" will be defined as "function".  The optional
                   bottom title data, "btd", is used on the default bottom
                   title to explain the PF key.  The text must appear between
                   parentheses, and must be three characters long.  If "btd" is
                   not specified, the first three characters of the function
                   are used.  Some special FLIST functions may be used as PF
                   key definitions (these functions are allowed only on PF
                   keys):
 
                     Function  Description
                       %%      Clear the definition for this PF key.
                       >I      Widen command input area to end of line.
                       BRW     Invoke BROWSE.
                       CAN     Cancel all levels.
                       END     Terminate the level containing the cursor.
                       SCB     Scroll backward (toward the top of the file).
                       SCF     Scroll forward (toward the end of the file).
                       SPL     Split the screen at the cursor position.
 
                   A record containing no keyword may be placed at the end of
                   the profile.  The contents of this record will replace the
                   default bottom title line of the display.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  FLIST creates a display of fileids and related information (much
              like the LISTX command output) on the screen.  Each line contains
              an input field that may be used for commands or FLIST
              subcommands.  If a command is placed in an input field, the
              corresponding fileid is passed to it.  For example, placing
              "BURN" in the input field of the line for "A FILE A1" would cause
              the command "BURN A FILE A1" to be executed.  Any CP or CMS
              command or EXEC may be used.  The special indicator / can be used
              in the input area:
 
                   /   Insert the complete fileid.
                   /n  Insert the filename.
                   /t  Insert the filetype.
                   /m  Insert the filemode.
                   /o  Omit the fileid (must be first item on line).
 
              Any combination of "n", "t" and "m" is valid to a maximum of
              seven characters.  If not explicitly specified, FLIST will append
              the entire fileid to the input text.  The /o indicator can be
              placed at the beginning of the line to suppress this.
 
              After executing a command, the CMS stack is processed.  Input
              starting with a / will replace the original command and be
              processed as if entered by the user.  Input not starting with a /
              will be passed to CMS without any change to the contents of the
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     88
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FLIST
 
              line.  If the stack is empty, the next input field is processed.
              When all input fields are processed, the screen is redisplayed
              and the input fields are marked to indicate the result of the
              commands:
 
                   *   indicates that the command completed normally
                       (return code zero).
                   ¬nn Indicates that the command returned a non-zero
                       return code (nn).
                   ?   Indicates that no command with that name exists.
                   +   Indicates that no FLIST subcommand with that
                       name exists.
 
          2.  Never re-access a disk which is displayed on one of the levels.
              Do not erase files displayed on any level with an EXEC or with an
              "ERASE * filetype filemode" command.  Do not erase a file which
              is displayed on more than one level.  These situations cannot
              always be detected by FLIST and the results are unpredictable.
 
          3.  The input areas on each display line may be made wider with the
              >I PF key function.  The supplied FLIST $PROFILE sets PF9 to this
              function.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         FLIST produces no messages, but can produce the following return
         codes:
 
            1  Console not a 3270-type terminal.
            2  Insufficient storage available.
           24  Invalid filemode specified.
           28  File not found.
           36  Disk not accessed.
         1xxx  Disk I/O error.  See the CMSDIO command return codes for a
               detailed list.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     89
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FORTG
 
         Use the FORTG command to compile a program with the IBM FORTRAN G
         compiler.  FORTRAN G is not supported;  VS FORTRAN generally should be
         used for new programs.  The FORTGCG, FORTGC, and FORTGG commands are
         available for use with FORTRAN G programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTG     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         Options
 
         BCD       permits the use of BCD characters rather than EBCDIC in the
                   source program.  This option exists to support non-EBCDIC
                   keypunches.  Further details can be found in the
                   Programmer's Guide.  EBCDIC is the default option.
 
         DECK      causes the object program to be written to the disk file
                   "filename TEXT."  This is the default.
 
         EBCDIC    specifies that the source program contains EBCDIC
                   characters.  This is the default.
 
         ID        specifies that internal statement numbers (ISN's) are to be
                   generated for statements that call subroutines or contain
                   external function references.  This information is used in
                   the traceback produced if an error occurs in the called
                   subprogram.  This is the default.
 
         LINECNT n is the number of lines on each page of compiler listing
                   output (ranging from 1 to 99).  The default is LINECNT 56.
 
         LIST      produces a listing of the object program.  The default is
                   NOLIST.
 
         MAP       produces a table of names.  NOMAP is the default.
 
         NAME name assigns a name to the object program.  The default name of a
                   main program is MAIN, the name of a subprogram is always the
                   name used on the SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION statement.
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     90
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FORTG
 
         NODECK    suppresses generation of an object program.
 
         NOID      See the ID option.
 
         NOPrint   suppresses the compiler listing.
 
         NOTerm    See the TERM option.
 
         Print     sends the compiler listing to the spooled printer.  The
                   default is to write the listing into a disk file named
                   "filename LISTING."
 
         SOURCE    produces a source listing.  This is the default.
 
         Term      displays compiler diagnostic messages at the terminal.  This
                   is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The FORTRAN language supported by the FORTRAN G compiler is
              described in the IBM System/360 and System/370 FORTRAN IV
              Language manual, and more information about the compiler can be
              found in the IBM System/360 OS FORTRAN IV (G and H) Programmer's
              Guide.
 
          2.  Before loading your FORTRAN program, you must define any
              subroutine libraries required (including the FORTRAN G library).
              If your program performs any input or output operations, you may
              also need to define the files to be used.  All unit numbers are
              defined to be disk files named "FILE FTnnF001" by default (and
              input files must contain 80-byte, fixed-length records).  To
              associate a FORTRAN unit number with a device, use a DD name in
              the form FTnnF001 (nn is the unit number), or just the number on
              a FILEDEF command.  For example:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB FORTGLIB
                   FILEDEF 5 TERMINAL
                   FILEDEF 6 PRINTER
                   LOAD filename ( START
 
              defines unit 5 as the terminal (for keyboard input) and unit 6 as
              the spooled printer.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     91
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTGC (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTGC command to compile a program with the IBM FORTRAN G
         compiler.  FORTRAN G is not supported; VS FORTRAN generally should be
         used for new programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTGC    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTG compiler options.
 
         Usage Note
 
         FORTGC is an EXEC that uses the FORTG command to compile a FORTRAN
         program.  The object program produced can be executed with the FORTGG
         command.  Refer to the description of the FORTG command for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     92
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 FORTGCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTGCG command to compile and execute a program using the IBM
         FORTRAN G compiler.  FORTRAN G is not supported; VS FORTRAN generally
         should be used for new programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTGCG   | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTG compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default FORTRAN G subroutine libraries are used: ZETALIB,
              FORTGLIB, and CMSLIB.  If you need to use additional libraries or
              load additional object files you must use the FORTGG command to
              execute your program.
 
          2.  FORTGCG is an EXEC that uses the FORTG command to compile a
              FORTRAN program.  The object program produced is then executed.
              Refer to the description of the FORTG command for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     93
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTGG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTGG command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the IBM FORTRAN G compiler.  FORTRAN G is not supported; VS FORTRAN
         generally should be used for new programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTGG    | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the
                   FORTRAN G (or FORTRAN G compatible) object programs.  The
                   filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  ZETALIB, FORTGLIB, and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the FORTGC and FORTG commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     94
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTHX
 
         Use the FORTHX command to compile a program with the IBM FORTRAN H
         Extended compiler.  The FORTXCG, FORTXC, and FORTXG commands are
         available for use with FORTRAN H Extended programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTHX    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         Options
 
         AD        is the same as AUTODBL.
 
         ALC       controls the alignment of data items in storage and is used
                   with the AUTODBL option.  Refer to the discussion of the
                   Automatic Precision Increase (API) facility in the
                   Programmer's Guide for more information.  NOALC is the
                   default.
 
         ANSF      causes the compiler to recognize only ANS built-in and
                   library functions.  NOANSF is the default.
 
         AUTODBL(value|NONE)
                   controls the Automatic Precision Increase (API) facility.
                   Refer to the Programmer's Guide for more information.  The
                   default is AUTODBL(NONE).
 
         BCD       permits the use of BCD characters rather than EBCDIC in the
                   source program.  This option exists to support non-EBCDIC
                   keypunches.  Further details may be found in the
                   Programmer's Guide.  EBCDIC is the default option.
 
         DECK      sends the object program to the spooled punch.  NODECK is
                   the default.
 
         DIsk      writes the compiler listing into a CMS disk file named
                   "filename LISTING."  This is the default.
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     95
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTHX
 
         DUMP      produces a dump if the compiler terminates abnormally.
                   NODUMP is the default.
 
         EBCDIC    specifies that the source program contains EBCDIC
                   characters.  This is the default.
 
         FLAG(I|E|S)
                   indicates the lowest level of diagnostic messages produced.
                   You can specify I (informational), E (error), or S (severe).
                   FLAG(I) is the default.
 
         FMT       is the same as FORMAT.
 
         FORMAT    produces a structured listing if OPTIMIZE(2) is in effect.
                   The default is NOFORMAT.
 
         GOSTMT    specifies that internal sequence numbers (ISN's) are to be
                   generated for statements that call subroutines or contain
                   external function references.  This information is used in
                   the traceback produced if an error occurs in the called
                   subprogram.  NOGOSTMT is the default.
 
         LC        is a synonym for LINECOUNT.
 
         LINECOUN (n|60)
                   is the number of lines on each page of compiler listing
                   output (ranging from 1 to 99).  The default is LINECOUN(60).
 
         LIST      produces a listing of the object program.  The default is
                   NOLIST.
 
         MAP       produces a table of names.  NOMAP is the default.
 
         NAME(name)
                   assigns a name to the object program.  The default name of a
                   main program is MAIN.  The name of a subprogram is always
                   the name used on the SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION statement.
                   Names are limited to six characters.
 
         NOOBJect  See the OBJECT option.
 
         NOPrint   suppresses the compiler listing.  The default is DISK.
 
         NOSource  See the SOURCE option.
 
         NOTERMin  See the TERMINAL option.
 
         OBJect    produces an object program.  This is the default.
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     96
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTHX
 
         OPTimize(0|1|2)
                   is the optimization level.  The default is OPTIMIZE(0),
                   which is the same as NOOPTIMIZE.
 
         Print     sends the compiler listing to the spooled printer.  DISK is
                   the default.
 
         SIZE(n)   controls the use of storage by the compiler, and may range
                   from 160K to 9999K.  The default is SIZE(MAX).  FORTHX
                   requires at least an 800K virtual machine to operate.
 
         SOURCE    produces a source listing.  This is the default.
 
         Terminal  displays compiler statistics and diagnostic messages at the
                   terminal.  This is the default.
 
         XL        allows the extended language features (STRUCTURE statement
                   and logical operations).  These features are documented in
                   the compiler logic manual.  NOXL is the default.
 
         XREF      produces a cross-reference listing.  NOXREF is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The FORTRAN language supported by the FORTRAN H Extended compiler
              is described in the IBM System/360 and System/370 FORTRAN IV
              Language manual, and more information about the compiler can be
              found in the IBM OS FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Programmer's Guide.
              The extended language (XL) features are documented in the IBM
              FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler for OS and VM/370 (CMS) Program
              Logic manual.
 
          2.  The FORTHX compiler will not operate in a virtual machine smaller
              than 800K, but compiled programs can run in smaller machines.
              Use the STORAGE command to change your virtual machine size.
 
          3.  Before loading your FORTRAN program, you must define any
              subroutine libraries required (including the FORTRAN libraries).
              If your program performs any input or output operations using
              units other that 5 and 6 you must also define the files or
              devices to be used before execution.  To associate a FORTRAN unit
              number with a device, use a DD name in the form FTnnF001 (nn is
              the unit number), or just the number on a FILEDEF command.
              (Units 5 and 6 are assigned to the terminal by default.)  For
              example:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB FORTLIB FORTEEH
                   FILEDEF 10 DISK DATA FILE A
                   LOAD filename ( START
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     97
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTVC (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTVC command to compile a program with the IBM VS FORTRAN
         compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTVC    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTVS compiler options.
 
         Usage Note
 
         FORTVC is an EXEC that uses the FORTVS command to compile a FORTRAN
         program.  The object program produced can be executed with the FORTVG
         command.  Refer to the description of the FORTVS command for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     98
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 FORTVCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTVCG command to compile and execute a program using the IBM
         VS FORTRAN compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTVCG   | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTVS compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default VS FORTRAN subroutine libraries are used: VALTLIB,
              VFORTLIB, and CMSLIB.  If you need to use additional libraries or
              load additional object files you must use the FORTVG command to
              execute your program.
 
          2.  FORTVCG is an EXEC that uses the FORTVS command to compile a
              FORTRAN program.  The object program produced is then executed.
              Refer to the description of the FORTVS command for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                        Section 2:  Command Descriptions     99
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTVG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTVG command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the IBM VS FORTRAN compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTVG    | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the VS
                   FORTRAN (or VS FORTRAN compatible) object programs.  The
                   filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  VALTLIB, VFORTLIB, and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the FORTVC and FORTVS commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     100
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTVS
 
         Use the FORTVS command to compile a program with the IBM VS FORTRAN
         compiler.  The FORTVCG, FORTVC, and FORTVG commands are available for
         VS FORTRAN programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTVS    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         Options
 
         CHARLEN(n|500)
                   is the maximum length for CHARACTER variables.  The default
                   is 500.
 
         CI(list)  are the id numbers of the INCLUDEs to be processed.
 
         CL        is a synonym for CHARLEN.
 
         DC(list)  are the COMMON blocks to be allocated at execution time.
                   library functions.
 
         Deck      sends the object program to be sent to the spooled punch.
                   NODeck is the default.
 
         DIsk      writes the compiler listing into a CMS disk file named
                   "filename LISTING."  This is the default.  DISK cannot be
                   specified on a  PROCESS statement.
 
         FIPS(F|S)  controls standard language flagging.  You can specify F
                   (full) or S (subset).  NOFIPS is the default.  FIPS is
                   ignored when LANGLVL(66) is specified.
 
         FIXED     specifies fixed-format source.  This is the default.  See
                   also FREE.
 
         FLAG(I|W|E|S)
                   indicates the lowest level of diagnostic messages produced.
                   You can specify I (informational), W (warning), E (error),
                   or S (severe).  FLAG(I) is the default.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     101
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTVS
 
         FREE      specifies free-format source.  FIXED is the default.
 
         GOSTMT    specifies that internal sequence numbers (ISN's) are to be
                   generated for statements that call subroutines or contain
                   external function references.  This information is used in
                   the traceback produced if an error occurs in the called
                   subprogram.  NOGOSTMT is the default.
 
         GS        is a synonym for GOSTMT.
 
         LANGLVL(66|77)
                   specifies the FORTRAN dialect used by the compiler.  77 (the
                   default) is ANS X3.9-1978, ISO 1539-1980 (known as FORTRAN
                   77); 66 is the older ANS X3.9-1966, ISO R1539-1972 standard.
                   Both dialects include IBM extensions.
 
         LC        is a synonym for LINECOUNT.
 
         LINECOUNT(n|60)
                   is the number of lines on each page of compiler listing
                   output (ranging from 1 to 32765).  The default is
                   LINECOUNT(60).
 
         List      produces a listing of the object program.  The default is
                   NOLIST.
 
         MAP       produces a table of names.  NOMAP is the default.
 
         NAME(name)
                   for old FORTRAN programs only, assigns a name to the object
                   program.  The default name of a main program is MAIN.  The
                   name of a subprogram is always the name used on the
                   SUBROUTINE or FUNCTION statement.
 
         NOOBJect  See the OBJECT option.
 
         NOPrint   suppresses the compiler listing.  The default is DISK.
 
         NOSDump   suppresses generation of symbolic dump information.
 
         NOSource  See the SOURCE option.
 
         NOSRCFLG  See the SRCFLG option.
 
         NOTERMinal
                   See the TERMINAL option.
 
         NOTRMFLG  See the TRMFLG option.
 
         OBJect    produces an object program.  This is the default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     102
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         FORTVS
 
         OPTimize(0|1|2|3)
                   specifies the optimization level.  The default is
                   OPTIMIZE(0), which is the same as NOOPTIMIZE.
 
         Print     sends the compiler listing to the spooled printer.  DISK is
                   the default.  PRINT cannot be specified on a  PROCESS
                   statement.
 
         SF        is a synonym for SRCFLG.
 
         Source    produces a source listing.  This is the default.
 
         SRCFLG    includes error messages in the source listing.  This is the
                   default.
 
         SYM       produces SYM information for the object program.  NOSYM is
                   the default.
 
         TERMinal  displays compiler diagnostic messages at the terminal.  This
                   is the default.
 
         TEST      is used with FORTRAN Interactive Debug.  NOTEST is the
                   default.
 
         TRMFLG    displays statements in error and the associated messages at
                   the terminal.  This is the default.
 
         Xref      produces a cross-reference listing.  NOXREF is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The FORTRAN language supported by the VS FORTRAN compiler is
              described in the VS FORTRAN Application Programming: Language
              Reference.  Other VS FORTRAN manuals are listed in the
              Bibliography.
 
          2.  Before loading your FORTRAN program, you must define any
              subroutine libraries required (including the FORTRAN libraries).
              If your program performs any input or output operations using
              units other that 5 and 6 you must also define the files or
              devices to be used before execution.  To associate a FORTRAN unit
              number with a device, use a DD name in the form FTnnF001 (nn is
              the unit number), or just the number on a FILEDEF command.
              (Units 5 and 6 are assigned to the terminal by default.)  For
              example:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB VALTLIB VFORTLIB CMSLIB
                   FILEDEF 10 DISK DATA FILE A
                   LOAD filename ( START
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     103
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTXC (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTXC command to compile a program with the IBM FORTRAN H
         Extended compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTXC    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTHX compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  FORTXC is an EXEC that uses the FORTHX command to compile a
              FORTRAN program.  The object program produced can be executed
              with the FORTXG command.  Refer to the description of the FORTHX
              command for more information.
 
          2.  FORTXC will not operate in a virtual machine smaller than 800K,
              but compiled programs can run in smaller machines.  You can use
              the STORAGE command to redefine your storage size if necessary.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     104
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 FORTXCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTXCG command to compile and execute a program using the IBM
         FORTRAN H Extended compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTXCG   | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the FORTRAN
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "FORTRAN,"
                   and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte records.  This
                   filename will be used for the TEXT and LISTING files, if
                   they are created.
 
         options   are FORTHX compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default FORTRAN HX subroutine libraries are used: FORTEEH,
              FORTLIB, and CMSLIB.  If you need to use additional libraries or
              load additional object files you must use the FORTXG command to
              execute your program.
 
          2.  FORTXCG will not operate in a virtual machine smaller than 800K.
              You can use the STORAGE command to redefine your storage size if
              necessary.
 
          3.  FORTXCG is an EXEC that uses the FORTHX command to compile a
              FORTRAN program.  The object program produced is then executed.
              Refer to the description of the FORTHX command for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     105
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  FORTXG (EXEC)
 
         Use the FORTXG command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the IBM FORTRAN H Extended compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | FORTXG    | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the
                   FORTRAN HX (or FORTRAN HX compatible) object programs.  The
                   filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  FORTEEH, FORTLIB, and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the FORTXC and FORTHX commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     106
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FSEND
 
         Use the FSEND command to send all or part of a CMS disk file to a
         personal computer or other system that is acting as your CMS terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |       +  + +      +   ++                               |
         | FSEND     | fn ft |fm| |start |end|| [( [options...] [)]]          |
         |           |       |* | |1     |*  ||                               |
         |           |       +  + +      +   ++                               |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Cr]   [Lf]   [Nl]   [Eofstring string]                |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Prompt x]  [Repeat x]                                 |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename of the file to be sent.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the file to be sent.
 
         fm        is the filemode of the file to be sent.  The default is "*,"
                   which searches all accessed disks.
 
         start     is the line number of the first line to be sent.  If "start"
                   is greater than the number of lines in the file an immediate
                   end-of-file occurs.  The default value is "1."
 
         end       is the line number of the last line to be sent.  The default
                   value is "*," the last line in the file.
 
         Options
 
         Cr        adds a carriage return character to the end of each line
                   sent to the terminal.
 
         Eofstring string
                   specifies a string to be sent after the last line in the
                   file.  This string is sent as a separate line, and is sent
                   even if no lines are sent from the file.  The string can
                   contain up to eight characters.
 
         Lf        adds a line feed character to the end of each line sent to
                   the terminal.
 
         Nl        causes a carriage return and a line feed character to be
                   added to the end of each line sent to the terminal.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     107
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          FSEND
 
         Prompt x  specifies the character used by the personal computer to
                   signal that the next line should be sent from the file.
                   FSEND pauses and waits for this character before sending
                   each line.  The default character is a carriage return.  The
                   PROMPT may be specified as a single character, two hex
                   digits, or one of the special names CR, DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4,
                   ESC, LF, NAK, NUL, or STX.  An empty line (carriage return
                   with no other data) is always recognized as a PROMPT.  Note
                   that all lines sent from an ASCII terminal must be ended
                   with a carriage return.
 
         Repeat x  specifies the character used by the personal computer to
                   signal that the most recent line should be sent again.  This
                   character is used in place of the PROMPT to indicate that a
                   line must be repeated.  The default character is a negative
                   acknowledgement (NAK).  REPEAT may be specified as a single
                   character, two hex digits, or one of the special names CR,
                   DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4, ESC, LF, NAK, NUL, or STX.  Note that
                   all lines sent from an ASCII terminal must be ended with a
                   carriage return.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Consult the section on ASCII Communication elsewhere in this
              manual for more information.
 
          2.  If the specified file is not found, it is treated as an immediate
              end-of-file.  No error message is produced.
 
          3.  All lines sent from an ASCII terminal must be ended with a
              carriage return character.
 
       |  4.  The KERMIT command also performs this function, and in addition
       |      provides error checking and other features.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSFSE001E No input data file was specified.  RC=24
         DMSFSE003E "string" is not an option.  RC=24
         DMSFSE029E No argument specified for the "option" option.  RC=24
         DMSFSE054E Incomplete fileid beginning with "string".  RC=24
         DMSFSE066E "PROMPT" and "REPEAT" are set to the same character.  RC=24
         DMSFSE070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
         DMSFSE104S Error n occurred while reading the file "file".  RC=100
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     108
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  GATHER (EXEC)
 
         Use the GATHER command to create a printer spool file from one or more
         files in your reader, retaining the original carriage control
         information.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | GATHER    | [spoolid...]                                           |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is one or more spool file numbers.  The specified reader
                   files will be combined into a single print file.  If no
                   spoolid's are specified, all of your PRT (print) and CON
                   (console) reader files (except those in hold) will be
                   gathered.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The file created by the GATHER command is sent to the current
              printer destination set with the SETPRT command.  The name of the
              print file will be the name of the first reader file in the
              group.
 
          2.  GATHER processes only PRT (print) and CON (console) files.  It
              can't handle PUN, DMP, or RDR files.
 
          3.  GATHER is an EXEC and uses the REPRINT command to process the
              reader files.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSGAT920E No files in reader.  RC=28
         DMSGAT920E File [nnnn] does not exist or is in hold.  RC=28
         DMSKXR070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     109
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       GETFMODE
 
       | Use the GETFMODE command to put the next available filemode letter
       | into a REXX or EXEC 2 variable.  The format of the command is:
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | GETFMODE  | variable                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | variable  is the name of a REXX or EXEC 2 variable.  (For EXEC 2, do
                   not include the initial ampersand in the variable name.  If
                   the name begins with an ampersand, the value of the variable
                   is used as the variable name.)
 
         Usage Notes
 
         GETFMODE puts the first available filemode letter into the specified
         variable.  Searching begins with mode A and continues through Z.  If
         all filemode letters are in use the variable is not set and a non-zero
         return code is set.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         If an error occurs, the return code is set to the message number:
 
       | UKCGFM100E GETFMODE can only operate when called from REXX or EXEC 2.
         UKCGFM102E Error accessing variable "name".
         UKCGFM103E No variable name was specified.
         UKCGFM105E Unable to set result variable.
         UKCGFM106E No filemodes are available.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     110
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       GETVADDR
 
       | Use the GETVADDR command to put the next available virtual device
       | address into a REXX or EXEC 2 variable.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | GETVADDR  | variable                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | variable  is the name of a REXX or EXEC 2 variable.  (For EXEC 2, do
                   not include the initial ampersand in the variable name.  If
                   the name begins with an ampersand, the value of the variable
                   is used as the variable name.)
 
         Usage Notes
 
         GETVADDR puts the first available virtual device address into the
       | specified variable.  Searching begins with address 195 and continues
       | through FFF.  If all addresses in the range are in use the variable is
         not set and a non-zero return code is set.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         If an error occurs, the return code is set to the message number:
 
       | UKCGVA100E GETVADDR can only operate when called from REXX or EXEC 2.
         UKCGVA102E Error accessing variable "name".
         UKCGVA103E No variable name was specified.
         UKCGVA105E Unable to set result variable.
         UKCGVA106E No device addresses are available.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     111
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                           GRIPE (EXEC)
 
         Use the GRIPE command to prepare a note for transmission to the UKCC
         User Services Group.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | GRIPE     |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Note
 
         GRIPE uses the NOTE command to create and transmit your message.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     112
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           HELP
 
         The HELP command displays detailed documentation for commands,
         explanations of CMS and CP messages, and other information.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | Help      | [topic]                                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         topic     is the name of the topic you are interested in.  This can be
                   a command name, a message identifier, or a general topic.
                   If you don't specify a topic, HELP displays a menu of
                   topics.
 
         Usage Notes
 
       |  1.  By default, the HELP command uses the Yale HELP (YHELP) system.
       |      If you want to use the standard IBM HELP command, then enter
       |      "YHELP OFF" to disable YHELP.  The HELP information supplied with
       |      CMS cannot be displayed with the IBM HELP command, but you can
       |      use it to display your own HELP files.
 
       |  2.  HELP information is available for all commands and error
       |      messages.  To display information about a message, enter only the
       |      first three letters of the prefix (usually DMS or DMK), the
       |      three-digit number, and the final letter (E, W, S, etc.).  Use
       |      the EXPLAIN command for information about the most recent error
       |      message.
 
       |      If you want information about a command that exists in several
       |      environments (like QUERY, which can be CMS, CP, or XEDIT), you
       |      may need to specify the environment name on the HELP command
       |      ("HELP CP QUERY," for example).  XEDIT subcommands require that
       |      XEDIT be specified ("HELP XEDIT SET PREFIX") unless the HELP
       |      command is entered from XEDIT.
 
       |  3.  The RH (Resume HELP) command can be used to return to where you
       |      left off in the HELP system during a terminal session.
 
       |  4.  HELP information is preformatted and kept in files with a
       |      filetype beginning "HELP."  If you want to create your own HELP
       |      information files, consult the information available online from
       |      the HELP command.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     113
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                             HI (CMS Immediate Command)
 
         Use the HI (Halt Interpretation) command to stop all currently
         executing REXX and EXEC 2 programs and macros.  HI halts execution
         without destroying the environment as HX (Halt Execution) does.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | HI        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  HI is useful for stopping an XEDIT macro without terminating
              XEDIT.
 
          2.  In a REXX program you can use a SIGNAL ON HALT statement to trap
              the HI interruption.
 
          3.  CMS immediate commands are only accepted from the terminal.  They
              may not be issued from an EXEC.  In some cases it may be
              necessary to cause an attention at the terminal before issuing an
              immediate command.
 
          4.  The SET IMMEDIATE command can be used to disable the CMS
              immediate commands.  QUERY IMMEDIATE to determine the current
              setting.  The initial setting is SET IMMEDIATE ON.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         One of these messages is usually produced as a result of HI:
 
         DMSEXE085E ERROR IN [fileid], LINE [n] - PROGRAM INTERRUPTED.
         DMSREX452E Error 4 running [fileid], line [n]: Program interrupted
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     114
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  HOSTCM (EXEC)
 
         Use the HOSTCM command to communicate with a personal computer system
         that is acting as your CMS terminal.  The personal computer must be
         running the Waterloo Computing Systems microSoftware.  HOSTCM and the
         microSoftware support two-way file transmission and allow CMS disk
         files to be accessed by programs running on the personal computer
         system.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | HOSTCM    |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The Waterloo Computing Systems microSoftware is currently
              available for the IBM Personal Computer, the Commodore SuperPET,
              and the Northern Digital microWAT.  An editor and a number of
              language processors (APL, BASIC, COBOL, FORTRAN, and Pascal) are
              available for these systems.  HOSTCM allows programs running on
              these systems to read and write CMS disk files, and to pass
              commands to CMS.
 
          2.  Terminate HOSTCM by entering "QUIT" at your terminal.
 
          3.  More information is available in the section on asynchronous
              ASCII communications.  Detailed specifications for HOSTCM are
              available online from the MANUAL command.
 
       |  4.  The KERMIT command also performs most of the functions of HOSTCM.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     115
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                     HT (CMS Immediate Command)
 
         Use the HT (Halt Typing) command to suppress terminal output from a
         CMS command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | HT        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Execution of the command continues and you can use the RT (Resume
              Typing) command to resume normal terminal output.  The HT command
              is only in effect for the duration of the current command.  The
              ready message is displayed when the command completes.
 
          2.  CMS immediate commands are only accepted from the terminal.  They
              can not be issued from an EXEC.  In some cases it may be
              necessary to cause an attention at the terminal before issuing an
              immediate command.
 
          3.  The SET CMSTYPE HT command can be used from within an EXEC to
              halt terminal output.  Terminal output will be suppressed until
              the end of the EXEC, or until enabled with an RT or SET CMSTYPE
              RT command.
 
          4.  Severe error messages (severity code S or T) are not suppressed
              by HT.
 
          5.  The SET IMMEDIATE command can be used to disable the CMS
              immediate commands.  QUERY IMMEDIATE to determine the current
              setting.  The initial setting is SET IMMEDIATE ON.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     116
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                     HX (CMS Immediate Command)
 
         Use the HX (Halt Execution) command to stop the execution of a CMS
         command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | HX        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Execution of the command terminates immediately.  Output to the
              terminal will continue until the output buffers have been
              emptied.  HX will also close all open files and clear existing
              FILEDEF definitions (including those made with the PERM option).
              Entering HX from CMS Subset terminates the command from which
              Subset was entered (XEDIT, for example) and returns to normal CMS
              mode.
 
       |      The HI (Halt Interpretation) command stops all currently
       |      executing REXX and EXEC 2 programs and macros without destroying
       |      the environment.  For example, HI will stop an XEDIT macro
       |      without terminating XEDIT.
 
          2.  CMS immediate commands are only accepted from the terminal.  They
              may not be issued from an EXEC.  In some cases it may be
              necessary to cause an attention at the terminal before issuing an
              immediate command.
 
          3.  The SET IMMEDIATE command can be used to disable the CMS
              immediate commands.  QUERY IMMEDIATE to determine the current
              setting.  The initial setting is SET IMMEDIATE ON.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Some commands and programs may produce a message when halted with HX.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     117
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INPUT
 
         Use the INPUT command to copy a reader spool file to a CMS disk file.
         The ACCEPT command is a more general way of performing this function.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                          +                           |
         | INPUT     | |spoolid [* [fm [fn [ft]]]]|  [( options... [)]]       |
         |           | |name [type [fm [fn [ft]]]]|                           |
         |           | | *      *   A1  =   =     |                           |
         |           | +                          +                           |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +       +     +     +    +      +  +       +           |
         |           | |Disk   |     |All  |    |Nohold|  |NOCc   |           |
         |           | |APpend |     |Data |    |Hold  |  |CCPrint|           |
         |           | |Replace|     |Jcl  |    +      +  |CCPrt  |           |
         |           | |DStack |     |Log  |              |Cc     |           |
         |           | |Xedit  |     |NOJcl|              +       +           |
         |           | |SELect |     |NOLog|                                  |
         |           | +       +     +     +                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +          +  +       +                                |
         |           | |Truncate n|  |RECfm V|  [NOMsg]   [Stack]             |
         |           | |SPLit n   |  |      F|                                |
         |           | +          +  +       +                                |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader spool file to be
                   processed.  The default is "*", the first file in your
                   reader.
 
         name [type]
                   are used to specify an input file by spool file name and
                   type rather than number.  Spool files do not necessarily
                   have names and types.  The default type is "*," the first
                   file that matches the specified name.
 
         fm        is the filemode used for the output file.  If omitted, the
                   default is "A1."
 
         fn        is the filename used for the output file (if any).  If
                   omitted, the default is "=," which will use the spool file
                   name.
 
         ft        is the filetype used for the output file (if any).  If
                   omitted, the default is "=," which will use the spool file
                   type.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     118
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INPUT
 
         Options
 
         All       copies the entire input file without OS batch output
                   editing.  This is the default.
 
         APpend    appends the output data to an existing CMS disk file.  If
                   the file does not exist, it is created.
 
         Cc        retains the carriage control information from the input
                   file.  The carriage control information placed into the
                   output will be American National Standard (ANS) carriage
       |           control characters added at the beginning of each line
       |           (refer to the PRINT command for a description of these
                   characters).  Lines containing only carriage control
                   information may be generated.  Carriage control will be
                   generated for input files that do not contain it already.  A
                   file created with this option can be printed with the CC
                   option of the CMS commands PRINT and TPRINT.
 
         CCPrint   retains the carriage control information from the input file
                   if the input file is a print (PRT) file.  Other files are
                   read as is, and no carriage control is generated.
 
         CCPrt     is a synonym for CCPRINT.
 
         Data      can be specified when the input file is printed output from
                   an OS batch job.  DATA excludes the JCL, system messages,
                   accounting box, and HASP log to be excluded from the output.
                   DATA is the same as NOJCL and NOLOG.
 
         DIsk      writes the output into a CMS disk file.  This is the
                   default.
 
         DStack    stacks the input spool file.  The first line in the stack
                   will be a line in the format produced by the STACK option,
                   followed by the lines of data.  The stack has a limited
                   capacity, and execution stops if the entire file cannot be
                   stacked.  Part of the file may be stacked, and the header
                   line may be missing.  DSTACK implies ALL and STACK.
 
         Hold      retains the file in the reader when processing is complete.
 
         Jcl       includes JCL, system messages, and the accounting box in the
                   output.  This option is for use with output from an OS batch
                   job.
 
         Log       includes the HASP system log in the output.  This option is
                   for use with output from an OS batch job.
 
         NOCc      ignores carriage control in the input file.  This is the
                   default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     119
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INPUT
 
         Nohold    purges the file from the reader when processing successfully
                   completes.  This option is ignored if an error occurs during
                   processing.  This is the default.
 
         NOJcl     excludes JCL, system messages, and the accounting box from
                   the output.  This option is for use with output from an OS
                   batch job.
 
         NOLog     excludes the HASP system log from the output.  This option
                   is for use with output from an OS batch job.
 
         NOMsg     suppresses the message that is normally issued to describe
                   the selected input reader spool file.
 
         RECfm x   specifies the record format of the CMS disk file created.
                   The default is RECFM V, which produces a file with variable-
                   length records.  You can specify RECFM F to create a file
                   with fixed-length records.  The RECFM option is ignored when
                   the output is appended to an existing file.
 
         Replace   writes the output into a CMS disk file, replacing an
                   existing file.
 
         SELect    suppresses data output.  This is used to determine if the
                   specified reader file exists and may be used with the STACK
                   option in an EXEC to identify the next file to be processed.
                   The selected file becomes the first file in the reader.
 
         SPlit n   breaks output lines into one or more additional lines at the
                   specified column.  The minimum column is two when NOCC is in
                   effect, three when CC is in effect.
 
         Stack     stacks a line in the following format:
 
                    *  fn  ft  fm  NOCC  spool-number  spool-type  origin
                                   CC
 
                   If message 922I (empty output file) is issued, an empty line
                   is stacked.  If errors are found in the command parameters
                   or options, or if the input file is not found, or if no
                   output disk is available, the line is not stacked.
 
         Truncate n
                   truncates the output lines to the specified length.  The
                   minimum length is one when NOCC is in effect, two when CC is
                   in effect.
 
         Xedit     passes output lines to XEDIT.  No disk storage is used.
                   This option may only be specified from XEDIT.  The XEDIT
                   option implies ALL, CCPRINT, and NOMSG.  Refer to the XEDIT
                   macro RINPUT for more information.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     120
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INPUT
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  If you specify the HOLD option to retain a reader spool file, be
              certain to purge the file when it is no longer needed.  Reader
              files are purged with the "BURN nnnn" command ("nnnn" is the
              spool file number).  You are charged for each spool file based on
              its size and age.  VM/SP automatically purges spool files when
              they are one week old.
 
          2.  If the spool file is output from an OS batch job, its spool file
              name will be the job name, and the spool file type will be the
              runid.
 
          3.  Unless otherwise specified, the disk file created by the INPUT
              command is given a filename and filetype to match the spool file
              name and type of the input file.  If the spool name and type are
              not valid as a CMS fileid, the filename will be the kind of file
              processed ("PRT," "PUN," or "CON"), and the filetype will be
              "FILE."  Some errors cause the name "INPUT CMSUT1" to be used for
              the output file.
 
          4.  If the input file is a print or console spool file, the CMS disk
              file can contain lines up to 151 bytes long.  Punch spool files
              can contain lines up to 80 bytes long.
 
          5.  Unless NOMSG is specified INPUT displays a message in the
              following format when a file is selected for processing:
 
                FILE nnnn type x mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss nnn RECORDS; name1 name2
 
                nnnn        is the spool file number,
                type x      is the spool type and class, such as "PRT A",
                mm/dd/yy    is the creation date,
                hh:mm:ss    is the creation time,
                nnn RECORDS is the number of input lines,
                name1       is the spool file name, and
                name2       is the spool file type.
 
              If the input file is printed output from an OS batch job, the
              accounting line from the end of the job will also be displayed.
 
          6.  Held spool files cannot be processed by INPUT.  Attempting to
              INPUT a held spool file will result in message 920E (reader file
              not found) being issued.
 
          7.  If message 922I (no output lines) is received, try the command
              again without editing options (JCL, LOG, NOJCL, and NOLOG).
 
          8.  A successfully selected file is ordered to the front of the
              reader files if it is retained (HOLD or SELECT specified).
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     121
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          INPUT
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSINP003E Invalid option "option".  RC=24
         DMSINP024E File "fn ft fm" already exists -- erase or specify
                    "REPLACE".  RC=28
         DMSINP029E Invalid parameter "xxx" in the RECFM option.  RC=24
         DMSINP066E Only one output destination may be specified.  RC=24
         DMSINP069E Disk "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSINP070E Invalid parameter "parameter".  RC=24
         DMSINP105S Error "nn" writing file "fn ft fm" to [disk|xedit].
                    RC=100
         DMSINP702I Reader file name not a valid disk fileid.  following
                    Id assumed:
         DMSINP702I Input cmsut1 fm
         DMSINP920E Reader file "id1 id2" not found.  RC=28
         DMSINP922I No output lines.  Reader file retained.
         DMSINP935E Bad reader spool block.  RC=100
         DMSINP942E XEDIT option can only be specified under XEDIT.  RC=88
         DMSINP946E I/O error (description) from device at address xxx.
                    RC=100
         DMSINP949E Files of type [type] cannot be processed by input.  RC=25
         DMSINP985E Insufficient storage to stack more data.  RC=25
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     122
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       IPL (CP)
 
         Use the IPL command to simulate an Initial Program Load function.
         This command is ordinarily issued automatically when you log on, and
         need not be used again except in unusual circumstances.  This is a
         summary of the most frequently needed and function of the IPL command,
         not a complete description.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | Ipl       | system  [PARM [parameters...]]                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         system    is the name of the system to be loaded.  You will normally
                   specify "CMS."
 
         PARM parameters
                   specifies up to 64 bytes of parameters to be passed to the
                   loaded system.  All of the characters on the command line
                   after the keyword "PARM" (excluding the first blank) are
                   treated as data.  The only parm that you might want to use
                   with CMS is "AUTOCR," which suppresses the initial CMS
                   prompt.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  IPL simulates the LOAD button or function found on the console of
              real Central Processing Units.
 
          2.  If the IPL is successful the loaded system will respond.  The
              first response from CMS is a line that describes the current
              version and prompts you to press ENTER or RETURN.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     123
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                 KERMIT
 
         Use the KERMIT (KL10 Error-free Reciprocal Micro Interface Transfer)
         command to communicate with a personal computer or other system that
         is acting as your CMS terminal.  The other system must be running its
         version of KERMIT.  KERMIT supports two-way file transmission.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | KERMIT    |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         KERMIT Subcommands
 
         CMS ...   issues the specified CMS command.
 
         CP ...    issues the specified CP command.
 
         EXIT      ends KERMIT and returns control to CMS.
 
         HELP      displays a list of KERMIT commands.
 
         QUIT      is a synonym for EXIT.
 
         RECEIVE   receives a file or group of files from the remote system.
                   If an incoming fileid is not legal an attempt is made to
                   transform it to a similar legal name.  If the file already
                   exists, KERMIT appends the new file to the existing file if
                   their record formats are the same.
 
         SEND fileid
                   sends a file or group of files to the remote system.  The
                   names of the files are passed to the other system so that it
                   can store them with the same names.  Wildcard characters (*)
                   are allowed in the fileid.
 
         SET       sets various parameters, such as maximum packet length,
                   logical record length, record format, etc.
 
         SHOW      displays the current setting of the SET command parameters.
 
         STATUS    displays information about the previous file transfer.
 
         Usage Note
 
         More information is available in the section on asynchronous ASCII
         communications.  Detailed specifications for KERMIT are available
         online from the MANUAL command.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     124
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                           KYREG (EXEC)
 
         Use the KYREG command to examine this month's Kentucky Register, the
         Computing Center's monthly newsletter.  The online edition is the
         complete Register, with the exception of the statistics and
         illustrations.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +      +                                               |
         | KYREG     | |Browse|                                               |
         |           | |Xedit |                                               |
         |           | |Type  |                                               |
         |           | +      +                                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Browse|    displays the Register with the BROWSE command (for
                   3270-type display terminals only).  BROWSE is the default
                   for 3270 displays.
 
         Type      types the Register on your terminal.
 
         Xedit     displays the Register with XEDIT.  This is the default if
                   you are not using a 3270 display.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSREG002E Sorry, the newsletter is not available at this time.  RC=28
         DMSREG070E Missing or invalid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Messages and return codes can also be produced by the CMS commands
         BROWSE, TYPE, and XEDIT.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     125
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  LABELS (EXEC)
 
         Use the LABELS command to print labels at your terminal, or produce a
         spool file for printing.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |               +     +                                  |
         | LABELS    | filename  [(  |Print|  [Copies n]  [Route dest] [)]]   |
         |           |               |Prt  |  [Forms x]                       |
         |           |               +     +                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | filename  [(  Terminal  [)]]                           |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the name of a SCRIPT file containing the information for
                   the labels.  The filetype of this file must be "SCRIPT."
 
         Options
 
         Copies n  is a SETPRT option that specifies the number of copies to be
                   printed.  Multiple copy requests are ignored for output
                   routed HOT (labels cannot be printed on the HOT printer).
                   The maximum value is 255, the default value is 1.  This
                   option is ignored in TERMINAL mode (repeat the LABELS
                   command for additional copies).
 
         Forms x   is a SETPRT option that specifies the forms to be used for
                   printing.  For output routed CENTRAL the default forms are
                   LT (3 1/2 by 15/16 inch labels with the mixed case print
                   train).  FORMS 5106 may be specified for labels with
                   uppercase-only printing.  Output not routed CENTRAL should
                   not use FORMS LT or 5106.  All output routed HOT is forced
                   to standard forms, and remote sites should be consulted in
                   advance before requesting any special forms.  An additional
                   charge to pay for the labels is added to the printing cost
                   for output using LT or 5106 forms.
 
         Print     sends the output to be printed.  The default routing is
                   CENTRAL, which will cause the labels to be printed in the
                   UKCC Computer Room.  If you are using the PRINT mode you may
                   also specify options for the SETPRT command.  PRINT is the
                   default.
 
         Prt       is a synonym for PRINT.
 
         Terminal  types the labels on the terminal.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     126
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  LABELS (EXEC)
 
         Route dest
                   is a SETPRT option that specifies the destination of the
                   printed output when using PRINT mode.  Output may be routed
                   to the HOT printer at the UKCC, to a HASP remote site
                   (RMTnn), to an RSCS site (Pnnnn), or CENTRAL (the default).
                   Only standard forms are available on the HOT printer.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The LABELS command is not compatible with the Waterloo SYSLABEL
              macro package.  Refer to the Waterloo SCRIPT User's Guide for a
              description of SYSLABEL.
 
          2.  The labels used at the UKCC, designated form LT or 5106, are
              3 1/2 by 15/16 inches.  This allows five lines of 34 characters
              on each label, with a single line space between the labels (this
              assumes printing 6 lines/inch and 10 characters/inch).  When
              printing labels at a terminal you should use labels of the same
              vertical size.
 
          3.  A copy for proofreading purposes may be printed by specifying the
              "FORMS STD." and "SPACE S" options.  This will cause the label
              data to be printed on standard forms.  If you specify ROUTE HOT,
              standard forms will always be used.  When SPACE S is used the
              label data will be printed without intervening blank lines.
              SPACE W will cause the data for each label to print on a separate
              page.
 
          4.  LABELS will use the SCRIPT command to process the file containing
              the label information.  This file should contain the data for the
              labels (up to five lines each) separated by a blank line.  A
              blank line will cause the text on the following line to print at
              the top of a new label.  Use the SCRIPT control word .SP to
              include blank lines within the text on a label.  You can cause
              all blank input lines to print as blank output lines by placing
              the following line at the beginning of your file:
 
                     .dm nl /.sp/
 
              If you use this method, you must place a .PA control word before
              the data for each label, or provide exactly five lines of data
              followed by a single blank line for each label.  Your file may
              contain SCRIPT control words, but the page length and heading and
              footing definitions should not be altered.  Control words named
              .NM and .PH are defined and are currently treated as comments.
              These control words may be used at a later date as part of a
              mailing and telephone list system.
 
          5.  When in PRINT mode, LABELS will use the SETPRT command to set the
              FORMS, ROUTING, and other options.  The destination userid (TO
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     127
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  LABELS (EXEC)
 
              option) is not changed.  A print file containing labels may be
              sent to your reader; such a file may be printed with the OUTPUT
              command using the LABELS option.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSLAB001E You must specify a filename.  RC=24
         DMSLAB002E File "fn SCRIPT" could not be found.  RC=28
         DMSLAB070E Extraneous parameters follow the filename.  RC=24
 
         Messages and return codes may also be produced by the SCRIPT and
         SETPRT commands.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     128
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  LEDIT
 
         Use the LEDIT command to edit files which are too large for
         conventional editors like XEDIT.  It is also much faster than XEDIT
         when you need to only make a few changes to a large file.  LEDIT has
         some limitations, so check the Usage Notes before you use it.  Changes
         made with LEDIT are written to the file as soon as you press the ENTER
         key.  LEDIT can be used only on 3270 display terminals.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | LEDIT     | filename [filetype [filemode]]                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the file to be edited.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file to be edited.  "*" is the
                   default.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file to be edited.  "*" is the
                   default.
 
         LEDIT Subcommands
 
         n         moves down n lines toward the end of the file.
 
         +n        moves down n lines toward the end of the file.
 
         -n        moves up n lines toward the top of the file.
 
         :n        makes line n the current line.
 
         /string   locates the next occurrence of the specified string.
 
         =         re-executes the last subcommand.
 
         ADD [TOP] [n]
                   adds "n" lines after the current (highlighted) line or at
                   the top of the file.  The ADD subcommand is relatively
                   expensive.  If you are adding several lines to a large file,
                   you should use the MARK subcommand.
 
         BAckward  scrolls back one screen toward the top of the file.
 
         Bottom    makes the last line in the file the current line.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     129
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  LEDIT
 
         CASE [U|M]
                   controls the way mixed-case letters are handled.  CASE M
                   (the default) allows mixed-case letters.  String searches
                   must match the case in this mode.  When you are in CASE U,
                   all data entered will be translated to upper case before any
                   changes are made to the file and before any subcommands are
                   interpreted.
 
         Change/string1/string2/
                   changes "string1" to "string2" on the current line.  The
                   strings must be the same length.
 
         CMS ...   executes the specified CMS command.  The command must be
                   valid in CMS subset.  If no command is specified, CMS subset
                   mode is entered.
 
         CURline n sets the current line position on the screen.  The default
                   is a line near the middle of the display.
 
         DELete [n|*]
                   deletes one or more lines, beginning at the current line.
                   The DELETE subcommand is relatively expensive.  If you are
                   deleting several lines from a large file, you should use the
                   MARK subcommand.
 
         Down [n]  moves down n lines toward the end of the file.
 
         FOrward   scrolls forward one screen toward the end of the file.
 
         Help      displays this information with the CMS HELP command.
 
         HEX       displays the current line in hexadecimal and EBCDIC.  Non-
                   displayable characters appear as dots.
 
         INFo      types a brief description of the file, including the number
                   of data blocks, and the date and time it was last updated.
 
         LAST      displays the last full screen of data in the file.  The
                   current line will be adjusted based on the CURLINE setting
                   and the number of lines on the screen.
 
         LEFT n    moves the display n characters to the left.  This is only
                   useful when the file has lines longer than will fit on one
                   display line.
 
         LRECL n   increases the logical record (line) length of a file with
                   variable-length records.
 
         MARK [n|ADD|DEL|CAN]
                   is used when several lines are to be added or deleted.
                   Enter MARK when a line to be marked is the current line, or
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     130
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  LEDIT
 
                   press PF11 when the cursor is on a line to be marked.
                   Entering MARK DEL will delete all marked lines.  MARK ADD
                   will add a line after each marked line.  MARK CAN will un-
                   mark all marked lines.  You can use QUERY MARK to determine
                   which lines are currently marked.
 
         Menu      is the same as HELP.
 
         Next [n]  is a synonym for DOWN.
 
         Query [CASE|CURline|LRECL|MARK|Verify|Zone]
                   displays current settings.
 
         QUIT      ends LEDIT.  Unlike most editors, this does not cause
                   changes to be discarded since all changes are written to
                   disk as they are made.
 
         Right n   moves the display n columns to the right.  This is only
                   useful when the file has lines longer than will fit on one
                   display line.
 
         SERial [*|n [*]]
                   causes serial numbers to be written if the file contains
                   fixed-length, eighty-byte records.  The increment may be
                   specified as n (the default is 10).  If "*" is not
                   specified, the first three characters of the filename are
                   placed in columns 73 through 75, and the default increment
                   is 1000.  The first line of the file is numbered n.
 
         Top       makes the first line in the file the current line.
 
         TYpe [n]  types n lines from the file.
 
         Up [n]    moves up n lines toward the top of the file.
 
         Verify n  makes column n the first column displayed on the screen.
                   This can only be used if the file contains lines longer than
                   the display lines.
 
         XC string1 string2
                   will change string1 to string2 on the current line.  Both
                   strings must be the same length and are specified in
                   hexadecimal.
 
         XL string locates the specified string (specified in hexadecimal).
 
         Zone n m  are the starting and ending columns for the locate
                   functions.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     131
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  LEDIT
 
         Program Function (PF) Keys
 
         PF1   Displays this information.
         PF2   Adds a line to the file following the cursor.
         PF3   Ends LEDIT.
         PF4   Tabs forward 10 spaces.
         PF5   Tabs backward 10 spaces.
         PF6   Discards changes typed on the screen since ENTER was pressed.
         PF7   Scroll up towards the top of the file.
         PF8   Scroll down towards the bottom of the file.
         PF9   Reuse last subcommand.
         PF10  Make the line under the cursor the current line.
         PF11  Mark the line under the cursor.
         PF12  Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Non-displayable characters are represented on the screen by dots.
              Any non-displayable characters on a line will be changed to dots
              if the line is changed.
 
          2.  You cannot change the length of a line in the file, even if the
              file contains variable-length records.  LEDIT does not remove
              trailing blanks from lines.
 
          3.  The verify columns refer to the columns of the file which are
              being displayed on the screen.  For example, VERIFY 1 displays
              columns 1 through 79.  The VERIFY, RIGHT, and LEFT subcommands
              affect the verify columns.
 
          4.  Most PF keys cause changes typed on the screen to be discarded.
              That is, if you make changes to the screen and then press any PF
              key (except PF4, PF5, and PF12) the changes are lost.  Changes
              are actually saved when you press ENTER.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSLED001E No filename specified.  RC=1
         DMSLED004E File not found.  RC=28
         DMSLED012E Disk filemode is read-only.  RC=12
         DMSLED013E Disk filemode is full.  RC=13
         DMSLED030E Work file $LEDIT$ $LEDIT$ exists.  Erase before using
                    LEDIT.  RC=32
         DMSLDT104S Error n reading from disk.  RC=100
         DMSLDT105S Error n writing to disk.  RC=100
         DMSLED109S Not enough storage.  RC=104
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     132
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                      LINK (CP)
 
         Use the LINK command to gain access to a minidisk belonging to another
         user (if the other user has authorized the link with AUTOLINK).  The
         CMS command ACCESS must be used after LINK to identify the new
         minidisk to CMS.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | LINK      | [To] userid disk1 [As] disk2 [level]                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         [To] userid
                   is the userid whose minidisk "disk1" is to be linked.  You
                   may use an asterisk to refer to your own userid.
 
         disk1     is the virtual device address of the minidisk.  This is the
                   address that user "userid" uses to refer to the minidisk.
                   Virtual device addresses are expressed as three-digit
                   hexadecimal values.
 
         [As] disk2
                   is the virtual device address you will use to refer to the
                   minidisk.  This address must not already be defined in your
                   userid.  The virtual device address that you assign may be
                   any unused value up to 5FF (hexadecimal).
 
         level     is the kind of link requested.  Links may be read-only or
                   read/write.  You may request a primary and secondary level;
                   the secondary will be used if the primary link fails.  In
                   order for any link to succeed, the userid that owns the
                   minidisk must have authorized you to link at the level you
                   are requesting.  The following levels may be requested:
 
                   Level  Meaning
                    R     Read-only.  Fails if another user has a write-link
                          to the minidisk.  This is the default when linking
                          to a minidisk that belongs to another userid.
                    RR    Read-only.  Disregards existing links.
                    W     Write.  Fails if another user has any link to the
                          minidisk.
                    WR    Write or read.  Read-link is made if another user has
                          a link to the minidisk.
                    M     Write.  Fails if another user has a write-link.
                    MR    Write or read.  Read-link is made if another user has
                          a write-link.
                    MW    Write.  Disregards existing links.  If two or more
                          users have write-links to the same minidisk, the disk
                          file directory may be corrupted and the files lost.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     133
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                      LINK (CP)
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Links made with the LINK command last only until you log off, or
              are logged off by the system.  You can drop a link with the DROP
              command.
 
          2.  An example may clarify the way links can be used.  Suppose the
              files on user XYZ101's A-disk (191) were to be shared with XYZ102
              and USR101.  User XYZ101 would first use AUTOLINK to authorize
              the links:
 
                   autolink auth 191 r user xyz102 | user usr101
 
              This need only be done once.  Users XYZ102 and USR101 would issue
              the following commands to make the files on XYZ101's A-disk
              available to them:
 
                   link xyz101 191 193 rr
                   access 193 b/a
 
              XYZ101's 191 (A-disk) would then be available as 193 (B-disk) to
              XYZ102 and USR101.  These commands could be placed in a PROFILE
              EXEC.
 
          3.  CMS supports only simultaneous read-access sharing of minidisks.
              If two or more users simultaneously have write-access to the same
              minidisk the disk file directory will almost certainly be
              corrupted and the files on the minidisk permanently lost.
 
       |  4.  If a user with write-access to a minidisk updates a file and
       |      other users with read-access then try to read that same file, the
       |      other users will get the older version of the file, garbled
       |      records, or CMS file system errors (most often DMSxxx104S: "ERROR
       |      3 READING FILE").  The users with read-access should issue the
       |      ACCESS command again to read the updated file directory.  Using
       |      filemode number 6 for shared files can eliminate this problem in
       |      some applications.
 
          5.  All CJS users have a minidisk at virtual address 191 (the default
              A-disk), and some users also have a minidisk at 192 (the default
              D-disk).  All users share (read-access) several CMS system
              minidisks, including some or all of 190, 19C, 19D, and 19E.  OS
              volumes occupy virtual device addresses in the 120's.  Other
              virtual devices generally occupy addresses below 100.  Unused
              addresses in the 19x range should be used first when making links
              to other users minidisks.
 
          6.  You can use the CP command QUERY LINKS to determine which users
              have links to one of your minidisks.  For example:
 
                   q links 191
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     134
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                      LINK (CP)
 
          7.  Refer to the descriptions of the ACCESS and AUTOLINK commands for
              more information about sharing CMS disk files.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
       | If a numbered message is issued, the return code is set to the message
         number; otherwise, the return code is zero.
 
         DASD disk2 LINKED R/O
         DASD disk2 LINKED R/W
         DASD disk2 LINKED R/O; R/W BY [n USERS[; R/O BY n USERS]]
         DASD disk2 LINKED R/W; R/O BY [n USERS]
         DASD disk2 LINKED R/W; R/W BY [n USERS[; R/O BY n USERS]]
 
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; NOT AUTHORIZED
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; LOCKED BY owner SINCE time
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; AUTOLINK UNAVAILABLE
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; AUTOLINK QUIESCED
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; AUTOLINK BUSY -- TRY AGAIN
         DMKLNC999E userid disk1 NOT LINKED; AUTOLINK SHUTDOWN/REIPL IN
                    PROGRESS -- TRY LATER
         DMKLNK020E USERID MISSING OR INVALID
         DMKLNK022E disk MISSING OR INVALID
         DMKLNK052E ERROR IN CP DIRECTORY
         DMKLNK053E userid NOT IN CP DIRECTORY
         DMKLNK101W DASD disk2 FORCED R/O; R/O BY nnn USERS
       | DMKLNK103W DASD disk2 FORCED R/O; R/W BY nnn USERS
       | DMKLNK106E userid disk1 NOT LINKED[; R/W BY nnn USERS]
       |            [; R/O BY nnn USERS]
         DMKLNK116E USERID userid NOT LINKED; CP DIRECTORY IN USE
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     135
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                   LISP
 
         An experimental partial implementation of the Utah LISP interpreter is
         available under CMS.  It is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | LISP      | [filename]                                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the name of an input file.  The filetype of this file
                   must be "LISP," and it must contain fixed-length, 80-byte
                   records.  If no filename is given, input and output will use
                   the terminal.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Some internal LISP functions are available:
 
                   PRBUFFER(T)          causes input records to be printed.
                   VERBOS(NIL)          suppresses garbage collection messages.
 
          2.  LISP uses OS simulation input and output.  The following DD names
              are defined by default:
 
                   LISPIN     Input (disk or terminal)
                   LISPOUT    Printed Output (disk or terminal)
 
          3.  Some additional information about the OS version of the Utah LISP
              interpreter is available in the UKCC Consulting Room in McVey
              Hall.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     136
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         LISTDS
 
         Use the LISTDS command to display information about data sets residing
         on accessed OS disks.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +      +                                               |
         | LISTDS    | |dsname| fm [(options...[)]]                           |
         |           | |?     |                                               |
         |           | +      +                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +      +  +     +                                      |
         |           | |FOrmat|  |PRINT|  [LIKE root]                         |
         |           | |PDS   |  |STACK|                                      |
         |           | |EXtent|  +     +                                      |
         |           | |FREE  |                                               |
         |           | +      +                                               |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         dsname    is an OS data set name.  The qualifiers may be separated by
                   either dots or spaces, and the final qualifier may end with
                   an asterisk to indicate a matching pattern.
 
         ?         indicates that the data set name should be read from the
                   terminal.  A prompt will be issued.  The data set name must
                   use dots to separate qualifiers.
 
         fm        is the filemode of the disk to be searched for the specified
                   file.  Use an asterisk to search all accessed OS disks.
 
         Options:
 
         EXtent    displays the allocated extents for the specified data sets.
 
         FOrmat    displays information describing the specified data sets.
 
         FREE      displays the free space extents on the specified OS volume.
                   You may not specify a dsname when you use the FREE option.
 
         LIKE root is used with the PDS option to restrict the display to
                   members with names beginning "root".
 
         PDS       displays the names of the members in the specified
                   partitioned data sets.  The FORMAT option may also be
                   specified with the PDS option.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     137
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         LISTDS
 
         PRINT     causes the output of the LISTDS command to be directed to a
                   spooled print file instead of the terminal.
 
         STACK     causes the output of the LISTDS command to be directed to
                   the CMS program stack instead of the terminal.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Use the OSDISKS command to access the OS volumes containing user data
         sets.  The first OS volume will be accessed as the H-disk.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSLDS002E Data set not found.  RC=28
         DMSLDS003E Invalid option "option".  RC=24
         DMSLDS048E Invalid mode "mode".  RC=24
         DMSLDS069E Disk "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSLDS117E Invalid extent found for "dsname" on "fm" disk.  RC=24
         DMSLDS221E Invalid data set name.  RC=24
         DMSLDS222E I/O error reading "dsname" from [fm|OS|DOS] disk.  RC=28
         DMSLDS223E No filemode specified.  RC=24
         DMSLDS226E No data set name allowed with FREE option.  RC=24
         DMSLDS227W Invalid extent found for "dsname" on [fm|OS|DOS] disk.  RC=4
         DMSLDS231E I/O error reading vtoc from [fm|OS|DOS] disk.  RC=28
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     138
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          LISTX
 
       | Use the LISTX command to obtain specified information about CMS files
       | residing on accessed disks.  LISTX supports most of the features of
       | the LISTFILE command and some additional features.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +    +    +  +++                                       |
         | LISTX     | |fn  |ft  |fm|||  [(options... [)]]                    |
         |           | |*   |*   |A |||                                       |
         |           | +    +    +  +++                                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +      +  +           +  +              +  +         + |
         |           | |FName |  |Sort Type  |  |COntrol CMs   |  |TRace ALl| |
         |           | |FType |  |     Name  |  |        OFf   |  |      ERr| |
         |           | |FMode |  |     Dtype |  |        ALl   |  |      OFf| |
         |           | |FOrmat|  |     DName |  |        ERror |  |      ON | |
         |           | |ALloc |  |     Rtype |  |        NOMsg |  +         + |
         |           | |Date  |  |     RName |  |        PAck  |              |
         |           | |Label |  |     Brtype|  |        NOPack|              |
         |           | +      +  |     BRName|  |        TIme  |              |
         |           |           +           +  |        NOTime|              |
         |           |                          +              +              |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +        +               +                +            |
         |           | |TERMINAL|   [DEScend]   |Before  mm/dd/yy|            |
         |           | |PRint   |               |AFter           |            |
         |           | |Exec    |   [TODay]     |FRom            |            |
         |           | |APpend  |               |THRough         |            |
         |           | |DIsk    |   [SYStem]    +                +            |
         |           | |STAck   |                                             |
         |           | +        +                                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +        +                                             |
         |           | |Header  |   [PREfix nn]  [SUFfix nn]                  |
         |           | |NOHeader|                                             |
         |           | +        +                                             |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        is the filename or general form of the filename of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.
 
         ft        is the filetype or general form of the filetype of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.
 
         fm        is the filemode or general form of the filemode of the files
                   for which information is to be collected.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     139
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          LISTX
 
         General Forms for File Identifiers
 
         *         All values of the specified parameter.
 
         [string]* All values of the specified parameter that begin with the
                   characters [string].
 
         *[string] All values of the specified parameter that end with the
                   characters [string].
 
         [string1]*[string2]
                   All values of the specified parameter that begin with the
                   characters [string1] and end with the characters [string2].
                   Question marks in [string1] and [string2] will stand for
                   non-blank characters only.
 
         A question mark (?) may be imbedded in a fileid parameter to indicate
         a character which need not match.  If more than one asterisk is
         specified in a parameter, then asterisks preceding the final asterisk
         will be interpreted as question marks.  The last asterisk will be
         interpreted as a question mark if it is not the last non-blank
         character in the parameter.
 
         A blank as the second character of a filemode specification will
         always be interpreted as a question mark.  Asterisks in filemode
         specifications are always interpreted as question marks.
 
         Fileid specifications may be preceded by a logical not indicator (¬)
         which will cause all files matching the specified portions of the
         identifier to be excluded from information collection.  The indicator
         must appear as a separate item on the command line.
 
         Output Format Options
 
         Header    includes column headings in the listing.  HEADER is the
                   default when ALLOC, DATE, or LABEL is specified.
 
         NOHeader  does not include headings.
 
         COntrol type
                   causes an "&CONTROL" record to be put at the beginning of
                   the file created with the EXEC or DISK options.  The allowed
                   values for "type" are:
 
                        ALl    ERror   NOPack   OFf    TIme
                        CMs    NOMsg   NOTime   PAck
 
                   Only one value may be specified for "type".
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     140
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          LISTX
 
         TRace type
                   causes an "&TRACE" record to be put at the beginning of the
                   file created with the EXEC or DISK options.  This will cause
                   the generated EXEC to be processed by EXEC 2.  The values
                   for "type" are:
 
                        ALl    ERr     OFf      ON
 
                   Only one value may be specified for "type".
 
         PREfix n  controls the number of "&nn" EXEC variables that are placed
                   before the data on each line of the file created by the
                   APPEND, DISK, and EXEC options.  The default is two.
 
         SUFfix n  similar to the PREFIX option, but the variables are placed
                   after the data.
 
         Output Disposition Options
 
         APpend    appends output to a file named "CMS EXEC A1".  If the file
                   does not exist, one will be created.
 
         DIsk      creates an output file like the one generated by the EXEC
                   option, except that PREFIX is given a default value of zero.
 
         Exec      creates a file named "CMS EXEC A1" containing one record for
                   each of the files that satisfy the given file identifier.
                   The data in each record will be preceded by the number of
                   EXEC argument tokens specified by PREFIX and followed by the
                   number specified by SUFFIX.  The default value for PREFIX is
                   two and the default value for SUFFIX is zero.
 
         PRint     causes output to be directed to the spooled virtual printer.
 
         STAck     causes output to be directed to the CMS program stack.
 
         TERMinal  causes output to be directed to the terminal.
 
         The APPEND, DISK, and EXEC options are mutually exclusive.  Any other
         combinations may be specified.
 
         Information Request Options
 
         Only one information request option may be specified.  Each option
         includes the information given by the options that precede it on the
         list.  The options and the information they display are:
 
         FName     Filename
         FType     Filetype
         FMode     Filemode
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     141
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          LISTX
 
         FOrmat    Record Format and Record Length
         ALloc     Number of Records and Disk Blocks
         Date      Date and Time Last Changed
         Label     Label of the Disk Containing the File
 
         Sorting and Selection Options
 
         Sort type causes the output to be sorted in the specified manner.  The
                   SORT types are:
 
                        BRName  Block Count, Record Count, Filename, Filetype
                        Brtype  Block Count, Record Count, Filetype, Filename
                        DName   Creation Date, Filename, Filetype
                        Dtype   Creation Date, Filetype, Filename
                        Name    Filename, Filetype
                        RName   Record Count, Filename, Filetype
                        Rtype   Record Count, Filetype, Filename
                        TIme    Creation Date, Time, Filetype, Filename
                        Type    Filetype, Filename
 
                   Only one sort type may be specified.
 
         AFter mm/dd/yy
                   list only those files created after the specified date.
 
         Before mm/dd/yy
                   list only those files created before the specified date.
 
         FRom mm/dd/yy
                   list only those files created on or after the specified
                   date.
 
         THRough mm/dd/yy
                   list only those files created up to and including the
                   specified date.
 
         Only one or two date-related selection options may be specified on a
         single command.  Each part of the date must have two digits.
 
         TODay     lists only those files created on the current date.  TODAY
                   may not be specified with any of the other time related
                   selection options.
 
         SYStem    causes the S, X, Y, and Z disks to be searched when a
                   filemode of "*" is specified.
 
         Usage Notes
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     142
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          LISTX
 
          1.  The creation date is the date (and time) that the file was
              created or last modified.
 
       |  2.  On EDF disks there are two pseudo-files that are listed by LISTX.
              These pseudo-files have filenames that are not valid for CMS
              files (eight asterisks), and filetypes of DIRECTOR and ALLOCMAP.
              The DIRECTOR represents the space taken by the CMS file directory
              on the disk.  The ALLOCMAP represents the space taken by the disk
              allocation map and will be found only on disks that are write-
              accessed.  These pseudo-files cannot be examined, altered, or
              erased.  The date and time on the ALLOCMAP is the time the disk
              was last modified (a file was written or erased), and its LRECL
              is the physical block size of the disk.  The number of records in
              the DIRECTOR is the number of files on the disk, including the
              ALLOCMAP and DIRECTOR.
 
       |  3.  Message 002E (file not found) will not be issued if LISTX is
       |      invoked from REXX or EXEC 2.  The message is issued from EXEC if
       |      &CONTROL MSG is in effect.
 
       |  4.  The output file created by the EXEC and DISK options is limited
       |      to 80 characters per line.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSLSX002E File not found.   RC=28
         DMSLSX003E Invalid option -- option.  RC=24
         DMSLSX022E Invalid '¬' specification.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Invalid control - control.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Invalid sort - sort.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Invalid date - date.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Invalid prefix - prefix.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Invalid suffix - suffix.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E Conflicting options - option1 + option2.  RC=24
         DMSLSX029E PREFIX+DISPLAY+SUFFIX is more than 80 characters.  RC=24
         DMSLSX062E Invalid fileid - fn ft fm.  RC=24
         DMSLSX069E A-disk not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSLSX105E Error n writing cms exec.  RC=100+n
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     143
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  LOGOFF (EXEC)
 
         Use the LOGOFF command to end a terminal session and disconnect from
         the VM/SP system.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | LOGoff    | [Yes|No] [Hold]                                        |
         | LOGout    |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Hold      retains the connection for a switched communication line.
                   This enables you to log on again without redialing the
                   system.  This parameter has no effect on locally attached
                   terminals (such as 3270-type displays), or remote terminals
                   using non-switched communication lines.
 
         No        causes your console log to be purged.  This parameter has no
                   effect if you are not spooling your console.
 
         Yes       causes your console log to be retained.  This parameter has
                   no effect if you are not spooling your console.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Console spooling is controlled with the SETCON command.  If you
              are spooling your console and you do not specify YES or NO with
              the LOGOFF command, a prompt will be issued to determine the
              disposition of the console log.
 
          2.  LOGOFF displays a list of your reader spool files (including an
              estimate of the charge for each) and asks which, if any, should
              be purged.
 
       |  3.  LOGOFF displays the cost of your terminal session during the
       |      current rate period and your current balance (if available).
 
          4.  Respond "ESCAPE" to any prompt from the LOGOFF command to cancel
              the log off.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSLOG070E "string" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be produced by the BALANCE, COST, CP LOGOFF, PURGE,
         and RDRCOST commands.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     144
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                     LOGON (CP)
 
         Use the LOGON command to identify yourself to the VM/SP system and
         begin a terminal session.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                      +    +            |
         | Logon     | userid  [password]  [Mask]  [Noipl]  |Apl |            |
         | Login     |                                      |APLT|            |
         |           |                                      +    +            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         userid    is the identifier assigned to you by the Computing Center.
 
         password  is the password you requested to be associated with your
                   userid.  If the password is not specified, a special prompt
                   with a security mask will be issued to read the password.
                   It is recommended that the password not be placed on the
                   command line because it would be visible on your terminal.
 
         Mask      specifies that a security mask is desired for entering the
                   password.  This option need not be specified; it is the
                   default when the password does not appear on the command
                   line.
 
         Noipl     specifies that the automatic IPL command should not be
                   issued by the system after logon.
 
         Apl       indicates that you are logging on with a terminal using the
                   APL character set and that the TERMINAL APL ON mode should
                   be in effect immediately.  APL should be specified when
                   using a correspondence or EBCD code terminal (such as an IBM
                   2741) or a bit-paired ASCII APL code.
 
         APLT      indicates that you are logging on with a terminal using the
                   APL character set and that the TERMINAL APL ON mode should
                   be in effect immediately.  APLT should be specified when
                   using a typewriter-paired ASCII APL terminal, such as a
                   DECwriter.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  APL is not available under CMS at the UKCC.  The APL and APLT
              options are provided to support terminals that have only an APL
              character set.
 
          2.  The LOGON command name may not contain line-editing symbols, but
              its operands may use these symbols if needed.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     145
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                     LOGON (CP)
 
          3.  Logging on after a disconnect (because of a hardware malfunction
              or the DISCONNECT command) is a called reconnecting.  When you
              reconnect the system will reset some CP SET and CP TERMINAL
              options based on the kind of terminal you are using.  You can use
              the CP QUERY SET and CP QUERY TERMINAL commands to determine the
              current values.  The initial values of some CMS SET options will
              depend on the type of terminal you are using when CMS is IPL'ed
              (this is done automatically when you log on, but not when you
              reconnect).
 
              The settings that cause the most trouble are CP TERMINAL
              LINESIZE, and CMS SET AUTOREAD and SET BLIP.  When using an ASCII
              terminal, you will probably want SET AUTOREAD ON and may want SET
              BLIP ON.  On a 3270-type terminal SET AUTOREAD OFF and SET BLIP
              OFF will be more useful.
 
              After reconnecting you may want to re-execute your PROFILE EXEC
              if you have one that sets any of these characteristics.  To do
              this, issue the command "PROFILE" (after entering "BEGIN"), or
              "IPL CMS" to reinitialize CMS and execute your profile.  If you
              intend to continue a terminal session using another kind of
              terminal (moving from a 3270-type terminal to an ASCII
              typewriter, for example), it may be easier to logoff rather than
              disconnect.
 
          4.  When you log on or reconnect, the system will display the number
              of spool files that you own (if you own any).  Reader spool files
              may contain notes or files sent to you from other users, or
              output from batch jobs.
 
          5.  The UKCC CMS User's Guide contains more information about logging
              on.
 
         Responses
 
         ENTER PASSWORD:
         LOGMSG - hh:mm:ss zone day mm/dd/yy
         * online news banner
         FILES: n RDR, n PRT, n PUN
 
         LOGON AT hh:mm:ss zone day mm/dd/yy
          -or-
         RECONNECTED AT hh:mm:ss zone day mm/dd/yy
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     146
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        MAKEBUF
 
         Use the MAKEBUF command to create a new CMS program stack buffer.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | MAKEBUF   |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The return code from the MAKEBUF command is the number of the
              buffer just created (this may later be used with a DROPBUF
       |      command).  When MAKEBUF is executed in an EXEC with an &ERROR or
       |      SIGNAL ON ERROR in effect, the non-zero return code causes the
              error action to be taken.
 
          2.  Each buffer contains a new program stack.  Commands that read
       |      from the stack (like the REXX PULL and EXEC &READ function) will
       |      read lines from the MAKEBUF buffers, beginning with the buffer
              most recently created.  When the MAKEBUF buffers are exhausted,
              input lines will come from the console input buffer.  When this
              is exhausted a line will be read directly from the terminal.
              MAKEBUF creates a stack of stacks.
 
          3.  MAKEBUF is used in an EXEC to insure that stacked lines from a
              command are read immediately:
 
       |           /* MAKEBUF Example */
       |           "makebuf"
       |           "stkdate"
       |           pull . . day .
       |           say "Today is" day
       |            .
       |            .
       |            .
       |           "dropbuf"
 
          4.  Buffers created with MAKEBUF may be deleted with the DESBUF and
              DROPBUF commands.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         MAKEBUF produces no messages.  See Usage Note 1 for the return codes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     147
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  MANUAL (EXEC)
 
         Use the MANUAL command to examine or print documentation.  Some UKCC
         manuals and documents are available online and can be examined (from a
         3270-type terminal) or printed.  A menu of available documents is
         available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |        | +                                                      +  |
         | MANUAL | |Menu                                                  |  |
         |        | |Browse name                                           |  |
         |        | |                                                      |  |
         |        | |             +        +  +             +  +          +|  |
         |        | |Print  name  |Copies n|  |Route dest   |  |Forms xxxx||  |
         |        | |             |       1|  |      Central|  |      NT  ||  |
         |        | |             +        +  +             +  +          +|  |
         |        | |                                                      |  |
         |        | |Tprint name  [STop]                                   |  |
         |        | +                                                      +  |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         Browse    displays the specified manual with the BROWSE command.  This
                   can only be used on 3270-type terminals.
 
         Menu      displays a menu of available manuals.  This is the default.
 
         Print     prints the selected manual.  Use the COPIES, ROUTE, and
                   FORMS options if desired.  These options are SETPRT command
                   options; other SETPRT command options can be specified.
 
         Tprint    prints the selected manual on your terminal.  You may
                   specify STOP or other TPRINT command options.  Refer to the
                   description of the TPRINT command for more information.
 
         Options
 
         Copies n  is the number of copies requested.  Multiple copy requests
                   are ignored for output routed HOT.  The maximum value is
                   255, the default value is 1.
 
         Forms xxxx
                   specifies the forms to be used for printing.  The default
                   form is "NT", narrow unlined paper with the TN print train
                   (uppercase and lowercase letters).  Other valid forms for
                   CENTRAL routing are 5162 and T.  Forms requests are ignored
                   with HOT routing, and may be restricted at remote sites.  A
                   remote site should be consulted in advance before requesting
                   special forms.  Specify "FORMS STD." for printing on
                   standard forms.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     148
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  MANUAL (EXEC)
 
         Route dest
                   specifies the destination of the printed output.  Any of the
                   following may be specified:  "RMTnn" for a HASP remote site,
                   "HOT" for the hands-on printer at the UKCC, "CENTRAL" for
                   the UKCC Computer Room, "Pnnnn" for an RSCS remote site, or
                   "TERMINAL" for the user's terminal (reader spool file).  The
                   default is "CENTRAL."  Note that output routed HOT or
                   TERMINAL will be limited to about 1600 lines.
 
         STop      specifies that output at your terminal will stop before each
                   page is printed to allow for manual forms positioning.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  See the description of the SETPRT command for more information
              about printing options and special forms.
 
          2.  The MANUAL PRINT function will leave the printer spooled back to
              your reader (SETPRT TO *).
 
          3.  You will be charged for printing a manual, just as for any other
              printed output.  The cost will be determined by the number of
              lines in the manual, the number of copies printed, and the
       |      routing.  For example, printing one copy of the UKCC CMS
       |      Reference at the Computing Center costs about $8.50 (internal day
              rate) for the CPU time, I/O operations, and output lines.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSMAN001E No manual name specified.  RC=24
         DMSMAN002E There is no manual named "name".  RC=28
         DMSMAN070E Missing or invalid parameter.  RC=24
 
         Messages and return codes may also be produced by the CMS commands
         BROWSE, HELP, PRINT, and TPRINT.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     149
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
         Use the MATCH command to compare two CMS disk files and describe the
         changes needed to make the first file match the second file.  The
         output from the MATCH command may be a typed or printed list of
         changes, or a CMS disk file in CMS UPDATE format.  The MATCH command
         replaces the less useful COMPARE command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | MATCH     | fileid1 fileid2 [updateid]  [( [options...] [)]]       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | BUFsize  n      +         +     +        +             |
         |           | COLumns  n m    |DATAstrea|     |HEADer  |             |
         |           | ISEQuence n m   |MSGstream|     |NOHEADer|             |
         |           | LINecount n     |UPDstream|     +        +             |
         |           | NSEQuence n m   +         +                            |
         |           | PREcision n                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +        +      +        +      +        +             |
         |           | |INCZero |      |INSZero |      |SEQuence|             |
         |           | |NOINCZer|      |NOINSZer|      |NOSEQuen|             |
         |           | +        +      +        +      +        +             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +        +      +        +      +        +             |
         |           | |TRAILer |      |TYPE    |      |UPDCtl  |             |
         |           | |NOTRAILe|      |TERMinal|      |NOUPDCtl|             |
         |           | +        +      |PRInter |      +        +             |
         |           |                 |PRT     |                             |
         |           |                 +        +                             |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fileid1   is the file identifier of the base (original) file.  The
                   filemode may be specified as "*".
 
         fileid2   is the file identifier of the second (modified) file.  Any
                   part of the fileid may be specified as "=", and the filemode
                   may be specified as "*".
 
         updateid  is the file identifier of the optional output file.  Any
                   part of this fileid may be specified as "=", and the
                   filemode may be specified as "*".  This file will be in CMS
                   UPDATE format.  Specifying this parameter implies the
                   options UPDSTREAM, NOINCZERO, NOINSZERO, and UPDCTL.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     150
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
         Options
 
         BUFsize   specifies the size of the input and output buffers, in
                   records, to be used for fixed-length record files (usually,
                   variable-length record files are read and written a single
                   record at a time).  A value of "*" (the default) may be used
                   to specify that the buffer is to hold as many records as
                   will fit in 4096 bytes (one page) or one record, whichever
                   value is greater.
 
         COLumns   specifies the columns of the input file records which
                   contain data to be compared.  The starting and ending column
                   values must both be specified.  See the Usage Notes for more
                   information.  The default value is "COL 1 *".
 
         DATAstre  specifies that output is to consist of a series of control
                   messages together with the deleted and inserted data lines.
                   This option is the default when the update file identifier
                   is omitted from the command line.
 
         HEADer    specifies that a header message describing the files being
                   compared is to be typed at the terminal before the
                   comparison operation begins.  This option is the default at
                   all times.
 
         INCZero   specifies that sequence increments of zero on CMS UPDATE
                   control statements are allowed.  This option and NOINCZERO
                   are meaningful only when the UPDSTREAM option is in effect.
 
         INSZero   specifies that records may be inserted at the beginning of a
                   file (after sequence number or "record number" zero).  This
                   option is the default when either the DATASTREAM or
                   MSGSTREAM options are in effect.
 
         ISEQuenc  specifies the columns of the input file records which
                   contain sequence numbers.  The starting column number and
                   length must both be specified.  See the Usage Notes for more
                   information.  The default value is "ISEQ * 8"
 
         LINecoun  specifies the number of lines on each page of printed
                   output.  A value of zero may be specified to suppress both
                   pagination and the printing of a title line on the first
                   page (to print the title line and treat output as a single
                   page only, use a very large value, like 99999).  The default
                   value is 55.
 
         MSGstrea  specifies that output is to consist of a series of control
                   messages only.  The deleted and inserted data lines are not
                   written.
 
         NOHEADer  specifies that no header message is to be typed.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     151
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
         NOINCZer  specifies that sequence increments of zero on CMS UPDATE
                   control statements are not allowed.  When this option is in
                   effect, insertion or replacement blocks will be expanded
                   into larger replacement blocks (gathering non-updated
                   records from the input file) until a sequence range is found
                   which will generate a nonzero sequence increment.  This
                   option is the default when a CMS UPDATE stream is being
                   created.
 
         NOINSZer  specifies that records may not be inserted at the beginning
                   of a file.  Instead, the first record of the file will be
                   replaced with a block consisting of the inserted records
                   followed by the first record.  This option is the default
                   when the UPDSTREAM option is in effect, since the CMS UPDATE
                   command cannot insert records at the beginning of a file.
 
         NOSEQuen  specifies that input records do not contain sequence numbers
                   and output records are not to contain sequence numbers.
                   This option is the default when the base input file contains
                   anything other than fixed-length, eighty-character records.
                   See the Usage Notes for more information.
 
         NOTRAILe  specifies that no trailer messages are to be typed.
 
         NOUPDCtl  specifies that CMS UPDATE control statements in the input
                   files are not processed specially.  These records take part
                   in the comparison operation just as do all other records in
                   the files.  This option is the default when either the
                   DATASTREAM or MSGSTREAM option is in effect.
 
         NSEQuenc  specifies how new sequence numbers are to be generated, if
                   needed.  Both a starting sequence number and an increment
                   value must be specified.  This option applies both to the
                   process of generating sequence numbers when none are present
                   in the input file and to the adding of new records at the
                   end of the file (when a low sequence number is available,
                   but no high sequence number limit is available).  The
                   default is "NSEQ 1000 1000".
 
         PREcisio  specifies the precision to be used in the hash comparison
                   algorithm.  The value must be from 10 to 25.  The default
                   value is 15.
 
         PRInter   specifies that output is to be written to the printer.  If
                   an update fileid is specified this option is ignored.  You
                   should issue a SETPRT command before using this option.
 
         PRT       is the same as the PRINTER option.
 
         SEQuence  specifies that input records contain sequence numbers and,
                   when possible, output records are to contain sequence
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     152
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
                   numbers.  This option is the default when the base input
                   file consists of fixed-length, eighty-character records.
                   See the Usage Notes for more information.
 
         TERMinal  specifies that output is to be typed at the console.  This
                   is the default if the update fileid is omitted.  If an
                   update fileid is specified this option is ignored.
 
         TRAILer   specifies that one or more trailer messages describing the
                   results of the file comparison are to be typed at the
                   terminal after the comparison operation completes.  This
                   option is the default at all times.
 
         TYPE      is the same as the TERMINAL option.
 
         UPDCtl    specifies that CMS UPDATE control statements (any record
                   beginning "./") found in the input files are not to take
                   part in the comparison operation.  Update statements found
                   in the base file will be ignored.  Update statements found
                   in the second file will be written intact.  This option is
                   the default when the UPDSTREAM option is in effect.
 
         UPDstrea  specifies that output is to consist of control statements
                   suitable for use by the CMS UPDATE facility.  Inserted data
                   lines are written after insert or replace statements.
                   Deleted data lines are not written.  This option is the
                   default when an update file identifier is supplied on the
                   command line.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The two input files used by this program may have any record
              format and length.  The output file will contain variable-length
              records if either of the two input files contain variable-length
              records.  If both of the two input files contain fixed-length
              records, then the output file will also contain fixed-length
              records.  In either case, the maximum output record length will
              be the maximum of the two input record lengths.
 
          2.  Note that the two input files must be similarly sequenced, in the
              sense that the COLUMNS and ISEQUENCE options must apply to both
              files.  Sequence numbers (if any) on the second file's records
              are ignored; however, the sequencing may affect the data
              positions (if "COL n *" or "COL * n" were in effect).
 
          3.  The COLUMNS and ISEQUENCE options control the positions and
              lengths of both the data columns and the sequence numbers in a
              record.  The NOSEQUENCE option may be used to specify that input
              records do not contain sequence numbers (if necessary, sequence
              numbers will be generated based on the value of the NSEQUENCE
              option).
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     153
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
              Sequence number columns are specified as "S1 SL", where S1 is the
              starting sequence number column and SL is the length of the
              sequence number field.  Data columns are specified as "C1 C2",
              where C1 is the starting data column and C2 is the ending data
              column.
 
              If the starting sequence column, S1, is specified as an asterisk,
              then sequence numbers are assumed to lie at the end of the
              record; S1 is calculated to be [record length]-SL+1.
 
              If the sequence number length, SL, is specified as an asterisk,
              then sequence numbers are assumed to be of variable length; the
              value of SL is calculated by scanning up from S1 to the start of
              the sequence number (first non-blank) and then scanning up to the
              end of the sequence number (first blank).
 
              If the starting data column number, C1, is specified as an
              asterisk, then the record data is assumed to follow the sequence
              number field (or lie at the start of the record if no sequence
              numbers are present); the value of C1 is calculated to be S1+SL
              (or 1).
 
              If the ending data column number, C2, is specified as an
              asterisk, then the record data is assumed to extend up to, but
              not including, the start of the sequence number field (or up to
              the end of the record if no sequence numbers are present); the
              value of C2 is calculated to be S1-1 (or the record length).
 
              If the value of S1+SL-1 is greater then the current record
              length, then SL is set to the [record length]-S1+1.
 
              If the value of C2 is greater then the current record length,
              then C2 is set to the record length.
 
              Note that S1=* implies that sequence numbers follow the data on a
              record and that C1=* implies that data follows the sequence
              numbers on a record.  Hence, several combinations are not allowed
              and will result in an error message.  These are:
 
                   If S1=*, then SL and C1 cannot be * (C2=* allowed).
                   If SL=*, then S1 and C2 cannot be * (C1=* allowed).
                   If C1=*, then S1 and C2 cannot be * (SL=* allowed).
                   If C2=*, then SL and C1 cannot be * (S1=* allowed).
 
              In general, it is advisable to use the option combinations listed
              below, where "s" is the length of the sequence number field and
              "r" is the length of the record:
 
                   COL 1 * ISEQ * s (sequencing at record end)
                   COL * r ISEQ 1 s (fixed sequencing at record start)
                   COL * r ISEQ 1 * (variable sequencing at record start)
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     154
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          MATCH
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSMAT002E File "fileid" does not exist.  RC=28
         DMSMAT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSMAT006E No read/write disks accessed.  RC=32
         DMSMAT019E Identical input files: "fileid".  RC=24
         DMSMAT029E "name" is not a valid operand.  RC=24
         DMSMAT029E Missing or invalid operand for the name option.  RC=24
         DMSMAT032E Invalid filename or filetype.  RC=24
         DMSMAT037E Disk "mode" is read-only.  RC=32
         DMSMAT048E Invalid mode "mode".  RC=24
         DMSMAT054E Incomplete fileid specified.  RC=24
         DMSMAT062E Invalid "char" in fileid.  RC=20
         DMSMAT069E Disk "mode" is not accessed.  RC=32
         DMSMAT070E [extraneous|missing] parameters.  RC=24
         DMSMAT104S Error n reading file "fileid" from disk.  RC=100
         DMSMAT105S Error n writing file "fileid" to disk.  RC=100
         DMSMAT179I Comparing "fileid" with "fileid".
         DMSMAT211E Invalid or incomparable column numbers.  RC=24
         DMSMAT938E Error n from cms name function.  RC=100
         DMSMAT970E File "fileid" could not be opened (code n).  RC=100
         DMSMAT985E Insufficient storage for match.  RC=25
         DMSMAT991I Files match.
         DMSMAT991I n records deleted starting at record number n...
         DMSMAT991I n records inserted after record number n...
         DMSMAT991I n records replaced starting at record number n...
         DMSMAT991I n replacement records...
         DMSMAT991I n smallest sequence number generated was n.
         DMSMAT991I n update records created.
         DMSMAT991I No sequence number increments were generated.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     155
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  MATLAB (EXEC)
 
         MATLAB provides a "laboratory" for matrix computations.  Use the EXIT
         subcommand to leave MATLAB.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | MATLAB    |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  MATLAB may not function in a virtual machine smaller than 600K.
              You can use the STORAGE command to redefine your storage size if
              necessary.
 
          2.  For more information enter HELP while in MATLAB or see the MATLAB
              User's Guide (available from the MANUAL command).
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     156
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                       MENUEXEC
 
       | MENUEXEC is used to provide REXX, EXEC 2, EXEC and program support for
         display panels created with the XMENU command.  MENUEXEC can display
         panels on a 3270-type display terminal and accept input data from the
         user at the terminal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | MENUEXEC  | menuname [(options... [)]]                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [LIB library]  [ALARM]       [CURSOR fieldname]        |
         |           | [UPCASE]       [EMSG]        [NOWAIT]                  |
         |           | [NONULLS]      [STACK LIFO|FIFO]                       |
         |           | [TEST]         [CLEAR]       [NOXVARS|XVARS]           |
         |           | [MAP]          [PA1]         [SKIP]                    |
         |           | [MDT]          [CURPOINT]    [FILE filename]           |
         |           | [WAIT limit]   [SMSG]        [RDR]                     |
         |           | [DEV address]                                          |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         menuname  specifies the name of the MENU file to be displayed.
 
         Usage Note
 
       | Refer to the XMENU and DMSCVT User's Guide or online HELP for details.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Unless EMSG is specified, MENUEXEC produces no messages.  Errors are
         indicated by a non-zero return code which is the same as the
         corresponding message number.  The text of the MENUEXEC messages can
         be found in a file named "MENUEXEC MESSAGES Y2."
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     157
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           NEWS
 
         Use the NEWS command to display the online news.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +         +                                            |
         |           | |CHECK    |                                            |
         | NEWS      | |Headlines|                                            |
         |           | |Summary  |                                            |
         |           | |Type     |                                            |
         |           | |Xedit    |                                            |
         |           | +         +                                            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         CHECK     checks for news, but does not display it.  If news is
                   available, the return code is zero; if there is no news, the
                   return code is 1, and a message is issued.  This option is
                   intended for use in an EXEC.
 
         Headlines displays the news headlines.
 
         Summary   displays a summary of the news.  This currently has the same
                   effect has the HEADLINES option.
 
         Type      types the news at your terminal.
 
         Xedit     inserts the news text into an XEDIT file.  This is the
                   default if NEWS is entered under XEDIT.  The XEDIT option is
                   valid only under XEDIT.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  By default, the NEWS command displays the news with XEDIT in a
              file named "Online News."
 
          2.  NEWS is implemented as an EXEC and a module.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSNEW070E "parm" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
         DMSNEW105S Error nn writing file to xedit.  RC=100
         DMSNEW942E The "XEDIT" option is only valid under XEDIT.  RC=88
         DMSNEW973E Sorry, no news today.  RC=1
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     158
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                    NOTE (EXEC)
 
         Use the NOTE command to prepare a note with XEDIT for transmission to
         one or more users.  This is a description of the simplest form of the
         NOTE command; other features and options are available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | NOTE      | name [names...] [CC: name [names...]]                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         name      is the name of a user to receive the note.  A "name" may be
                   a userid or a nickname (from a NAMES file).  You may specify
                   more than one name, and a nickname may refer to more than
                   one userid.
 
         CC: name  is the name of a user to receive a complimentary copy.  The
                   rules for these names are the same as those for the
                   principle recipients.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The note created by the NOTE command is sent as a reader spool
              file to the designated users.  The file will be in the NETDATA
              format.  The recipients may examine the note with the PEEK
              command, or copy the note to a permanent CMS disk file with the
              ACCEPT command.
 
          2.  The NOTE command supports a number of options, including ACK and
              NOACK options similar to those of the SENDFILE command.  The
              default options of the NOTE command can be changed with the
              DEFAULTS command.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro
              Reference or to the online HELP command for more information.
 
          3.  The nicknames used by the NOTE command are kept in a CMS disk
              file named "userid NAMES", where "userid" is your userid.  This
              file can be maintained with the NAMES command, or edited directly
              with XEDIT.  The NAMES file is also used by the TELL, SENDFILE,
              and NAMEFIND commands.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro
              Reference or to the online HELP command for more details about
              these commands.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     159
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 OSDISKS (EXEC)
 
         Use the OSDISK command to access the OS rental disks that contain user
         data sets.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +                        +                             |
       | | OSDISKs   | | ON | ACCess | LINK     |                             |
       | |           | | OFF | RELease | DETach |                             |
         |           | +                        +                             |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
       | ON        links and accesses the OS rental volumes.  This is the
       |           default.  ACCESS and LINK are synonyms for ON.
 
       | OFF       releases the OS rental volumes.  RELEASE and DETACH are
       |           synonyms for OFF.
 
         Usage Note
 
         OSDISKS accesses the OS rental volumes beginning with mode H.  Use the
         QUERY DISK command to display the names of the currently accessed
         disks, both OS and CMS.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSOSD070E The correct format is OSDISKS ON or OSDISKS OFF.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be produced by the CMS command ACCESS.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     160
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 OSXEDIT (EXEC)
 
         Use the OSXEDIT command to examine an OS disk data set with the System
         Product editor (XEDIT).  The OS data set cannot be modified, but it
         can be saved as a CMS disk file, with or without modifications.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | OSXEDIT   | dsname [(member [)]]                                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         dsname    is the name of the OS data set.  Each part (qualifier) of
                   the data set name is limited to eight characters, with a
                   blank or a period between each.
 
         member    is an optional member name.  The member name is only used
                   when editing a member of a partitioned data set (PDS).
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  OSXEDIT uses a fileid of "OS DATASET A1" for the file.  You can
              save the file on disk under another name by issuing the SAVE or
              FILE subcommand with a fileid ("FILE SAMPLE DATA," for example).
 
          2.  The OSDISKS command is issued by OSXEDIT to access the OS rental
              disks if it has not already been issued.
 
          3.  Attempting to edit a member of a PDS that does not exist will
              cause the following messages to be issued:
 
                   DMSSOP036E OPEN ERROR CODE '08' ON 'SYSIN '.
                   DMSXDS591E OPEN ERROR ON SYSIN.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSOSX001E No data set name specified.  RC=24
         DMSOSX002E OS data set not found.  RC=28
         DMSOSX070E Incorrectly specified data set or member name.  RC=24
 
         Messages may also be generated by the FILEDEF, STATE, and XEDIT
         commands.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     161
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         OUTPUT
 
         Use the OUTPUT command to print or plot a reader spool file (such as
         output returned from a batch job), or to send a reader spool file to
         another VM/SP user.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +           +                                          |
         | OUTPUT    | |spoolid [*]|  [( options... [)]]                      |
         |           | |name [type]|                                          |
         |           | | *     *   |                                          |
         |           | +           +                                          |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +                 +   +        +   [Copies n]          |
         |           | |PLot             |   |DOCument|                       |
         |           | |Route destination|   |LABels  |   [Pagesize n]        |
         |           | |To userid        |   +        +                       |
         |           | |User userid      |                [Forms xxxx]        |
         |           | +                 +                                    |
         |           |                                    [Space x]           |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader spool file to be
                   processed.  The default is "*," the first file in your
                   reader.
 
         name [type]
                   are used to specify a file by spool file name and type
                   rather than number.  Spool files do not necessarily have
                   names and types.  The default type is "*," the first file
                   that matches the specified name.
 
         Options
 
         Copies n  is the number of copies to be printed.  The default is one
                   copy.  This option only applies to output routed to a HASP
                   printer (except the HOT printer).
 
         DOCument  will cause PAGESIZE 0 and FORMS NT to be used (the normal
                   settings for printing SCRIPT output).  This option only
                   applies to output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         Forms xxxx
                   is the printer forms designation.  The default is standard
                   (STD.) forms.  Refer to the Usage Notes for more
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     162
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         OUTPUT
 
                   information.  Specifying the special forms implies the SPACE
                   W option.  This option only applies to output routed to a
                   HASP printer.
 
         K         is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         LABels    will cause PAGESIZE 0 and FORMS LT to be used.  This option
                   is used for printing labels and only applies to output
                   routed to a HASP printer.
 
         Linect    is a synonym for PAGESIZE.
 
         N         is a synonym for COPIES.
 
         Pagesize n
                   is the number of lines per page.  The default is 61 and the
                   maximum is 255.  If zero is specified, automatic page
                   skipping is not provided.  This option applies only to
                   output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         PLot      sends the reader file to be plotted on the Zeta plotter in
                   the UKCC Computer Room.  This option should only be
                   specified for spool files containing plot output in Zeta
                   Graphics Machine Language (GML) format as produced by the
                   standard plotting routines.
 
         Route destination
                   specifies the destination of the output.  Any of the
                   following may be used:
 
                   Central   HASP Printer in the UKCC Computer Room
                   Hot       HASP Hands-on (HOT) Printer at the UKCC
                   Local     Synonym for CENTRAL (This option isn't recommended
                             and is included only for compatibility with old
                             applications.)
                   Pnnnn     RSCS Remote Printer "nnnn"
                   RMTnn     HASP Remote Site "nn"
                   Terminal  Your Userid (Reader Spool File)
                   userid    Any VM/SP Userid (Reader Spool File)
 
         Space n   determines the carriage control used.  SPACE S causes single
                   spacing of output, SPACE W allows normal carriage control.
                   The default is SPACE S unless special forms are used.  This
                   option applies only to output routed to a HASP printer.
 
         To userid will cause the reader file to be sent to the specified
                   userid rather than to be printed or plotted.  This can be
                   used to send a file to another user, who could then use
                   ACCEPT, PEEK, OUTPUT, etc.
 
         User      is a synonym for TO.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     163
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         OUTPUT
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  A message will be sent to you when the file is received for
              printing or plotting.  This message will contain the identifier
              assigned by the system that will be processing the output (HASP,
              RSCS, or the plotting system).  If your output was routed to the
              HASP HOT printer in McVey Hall you will receive another message
              when it begins printing.  If you have SET MSG OFF, these messages
              will be suppressed.
 
          2.  Output routed HOT is limited to 1600 lines, and the multiple
              copies option will be ignored for output routed to either HOT or
              TERMINAL.
 
          3.  There are restrictions on the use of special FORMS.  The FORMS
              option is ignored for output routed HOT or TERMINAL.  Since each
              remote site controls its own special forms, a site should be
              consulted in advance before requesting any special forms.  Output
              routed CENTRAL can use any of the following special forms:
 
                 LT     Labels (3 1/2" by 15/16"), TN (mixed case) Print Train
                 NT     Narrow Unlined Paper, TN (mixed case) Print Train
                 STD.   Regular Paper, PN (uppercase) Print Train
                 T      Regular Paper, TN (mixed case) Print Train
                 5106   Labels (3 1/2" by 15/16"), PN (uppercase) Print Train
                 5162   Narrow Unlined Paper, PN (uppercase) Print Train
 
              There is an additional charge for printing on labels (forms LT
              and 5106) routed CENTRAL.
 
          4.  Note that "PAGESIZE 0", which suppresses automatic page skipping,
              should be specified when printing SCRIPT output, since SCRIPT
              will control page skipping itself.  The DOCUMENT and LABELS
              options set "PAGESIZE 0".
 
          5.  A held reader file cannot be processed by OUTPUT.  Any attempt to
              do so will result in message 920E being issued.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSOUT003E Invalid option "option".  RC=24
         DMSOUT029E Invalid parameter "parm" in the option "option" field.
                    RC=24
         DMSOUT070E Invalid parameter "parameter".  RC=24
         DMSOUT920E Reader file "identifier" not found.  RC=28
         DMSOUT921E Error "nn" from reader.  RC=100
         DMSOUT935E Bad reader spool block.  RC=100
 
         Messages may be produced by the CP commands TAG and TRANSFER.  HASP,
         RSCS, and the plotting system will send messages to acknowledge
         receipt of a file.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     164
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                    PACK (EXEC)
 
         Use the PACK command to convert a CMS disk file to packed format.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |     +    +    +    +    +   +++++                      |
         | PACK      | ifn |ift |ifm |ofn |oft |ofm|||||                      |
         |           |     |*   |A   |=   |=   |=  |||||                      |
         |           |     +    +    +    +    +   +++++                      |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ifn       is the filename of the CMS disk file to be packed.
 
         ift       is the filetype of the input file.
 
         ifm       is the filemode of the input file.  The default is "A."
 
         ofn       is the filename of the packed output file.  The default is
                   "=," the input filename.
 
         oft       is the filetype of the output file.  The default is "=," the
                   input filetype.
 
         ofm       is the filemode of the output file.  The default is "=," the
                   input filemode.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Packed files are kept on disk in a special compressed format that
              usually requires much less disk space than normal format.  Once a
              file has been packed, it can no longer be processed by most CMS
              commands (such as PRINT, SCRIPT, SUBMIT, etc.).  Only COPYFILE,
              DISK, UNPACK, and XEDIT should be used with packed files.  Only
              XEDIT should be used to modify or examine a file in packed
              format.  Modifying a packed file improperly will make it
              impossible to unpack the file or recover the data.
 
          2.  Use the UNPACK command to convert a packed file to normal format.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Messages may be generated by the CMS COPYFILE command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     165
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PASCAL
 
         Use the PASCAL command to compile a program with the P4 Pascal
         compiler.  P4 Pascal is not supported.  The PAS4CG, PAS4C, and PAS4G
         commands are available for use with P4 Pascal programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PASCAL    | filename  [( options... [)]]                           |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the Pascal
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PASCAL."
                   This filename will be used for the TEXT, LISTING, EXEC, and
                   P4ASSEM files, if they are created.
 
         Options
 
         If conflicting options are specified the last option given is used.
 
         ATtribute specifies that an attribute table is to be generated.  This
                   option sets the value of the compiler directive A to A+.
                   This is the default.
 
         COErce    specifies that less rigorous type checking is to be
                   performed.  This option provides compatibility with the
                   level of type checking performed by the CDC 6000 compilers.
                   This option sets the value of the compiler directive C to
                   C+.  NOCOERCE is the default.
 
         CONcat    allows the compilation of a program which is held in several
                   files.  The named file ("filename PASCAL") contains a list
                   of these files, with one fileid (filename and filetype) per
                   line.  The source appears as a continuous stream to the
                   compiler.
 
         DEbug     causes the compiler to generate code to check array bounds,
                   assignments to sub-range types, line number tracing, etc.
                   This option sets the initial value of the compiler directive
                   D to D+.  This is the default.
 
         DIsk      will send the output listing to a disk file named "filename
                   LISTING A1."  This is the default.
 
         EXec      causes the generation of an EXEC named "filename EXEC A1"
                   which can be used to execute the object program.  NOEXEC is
                   the default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     166
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PASCAL
 
         EXtern    will force the compiler to use the first eight characters of
                   a procedure or function name as the external name to be used
                   by the CMS loader, instead of the unique internal name that
                   would ordinarily be used.  In order to be used successfully,
                   all names must be unique (only the first seven characters
                   being considered).  EXTERN is most useful for generating
                   program libraries.  This option sets the value of the
                   compiler directive E to E+.  The default is NOEXTERN.
 
         INstore   causes the intermediate P-code to be held in storage between
                   the compile and assembly stages.  INSTORE implies the OBJECT
                   option.
 
         KEepasm   will cause the P-code generated by the compiler to be kept
                   on disk in a file named "filename P4ASSEM A1."  KEEPASM
                   implies the ONDISK option.
 
         LInecoun n
                   sets the number of lines on each page of compiler listing
                   (must be greater than 9).  The default is LINECOUNT 55.
 
         NOATtribu See the ATTRIBUTE option.
 
         NODEbug   See the DEBUG option.
 
         NOOBject  See the OBJECT option.
 
         NOPRint   will suppress the output listing.  The default is DISK.
 
         NOSEGmen  See the SEGMENT option.
 
         NOSEQuen  suppresses margin marking and causes the compiler to check
                   the entire input record (up to the limit of 130 bytes).
                   SEQUENCE is the default.
 
         NOTerm    See the TERM option.
 
         NOXRef    See the XREF option.
 
         OBject    causes the object program to be put into a disk file named
                   "filename TEXT A1".  This is the default.
 
         ONdisk    will cause the compiler intermediate code to be written on
                   disk.  This option reduces the storage requirements of the
                   compiler by 384K, but increases compilation time.  ONDISK
                   implies the OBJECT option.
 
         PRint     will send the output listing to the virtual printer.  The
                   default is DISK.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     167
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PASCAL
 
         REsword   causes reserved words to be bold-printed and converted to
                   lowercase.  This option sets the initial value of the R
                   compiler directive to R+.  NORESWORD is the default.
 
         SEGment   causes the PASCAL command to attempt to use the PASCAL
                   shared segment.  This is the default, but no shared segment
                   is available at this time.
 
         SEQuence  causes the compiler to examine only the first 72 characters
                   of each input record, allowing sequence numbers to appear
                   afterward, and causes the margins of the input record
                   examined to be marked on the program listing with a vertical
                   bar.  This option sets the I and U compiler directives to I+
                   and U+.  This is the default.
 
         TErm      causes diagnostic messages to be displayed on the terminal.
                   This is the default.
 
         WArn      causes warnings to be issued for non-standard features used
                   and sets the initial value of the compiler directive W to
                   W+.  NOWARN is the default.
 
         XRef      causes generation of a program cross-reference listing and
                   sets the initial value of the X compiler directive to X+.
                   This is the default.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The P4 Pascal compiler accepts the language described in the
              Pascal User Manual and Report, with several extensions and
              restrictions.  The UKCC CMS P4 Pascal User's Guide (available
              from the MANUAL command) describes the compiler in detail.
 
          2.  The P4 Pascal compiler will not operate in a virtual machine
              smaller than 600K, but compiled programs can execute in smaller
              machines.  You can use the STORAGE command to redefine your
              storage size if necessary.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     168
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                               PASSWORD
 
         Use the PASSWORD command to change your logon password.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PASSWORD  | [target] [( [NOPRompt]  [QUIET] [)]]                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         target    is the userid or project number to be affected.  The default
                   is your userid.  If you specify a userid or project number
                   for which you are not authorized the password will not be
                   changed and the system will record the attempt.
 
         Options
 
         NOPRompt  suppresses the prompt messages.  The prompts are suppressed
                   also if data is available in the program stack or console
                   input buffer.
 
         QUIET     suppresses all error messages.  If an error occurs the
                   return code indicates the nature of the error.  This option
                   is intended for use in an EXEC.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  PASSWORD prompts you to enter your current password, and then
              asks for the new password twice (the two must match).  The
              passwords are masked during input, so the new password is read
              twice to reduce the chances of a typing error.
 
              You cannot display your current password or change your password
              if you do not know it, so be careful when entering the new
              password.  If you forget your password contact the person
              authorized to maintain your userid or project number (instructor,
              etc.) or the Computing Center office.  No one can determine your
              current password, but a new password can be set for you.  The
              Computing Center office is open from 8:00 am to 4:30 pm (EST),
              Monday through Friday; it is closed on university holidays.
 
          2.  A password can be from two through eight characters long.
              Letters, numbers, and special characters can be used; lowercase
              letters are converted to uppercase.  Control characters cannot be
              used.  Extra care will be needed to use one of the CP line
              editing characters.  (The defaults are #, @, and ".  Refer to the
              description of the TERMINAL command for more information.)  A
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     169
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                               PASSWORD
 
              password cannot be entirely blank, contain imbedded blanks, or
              begin with "NOLOG."
 
          3.  The system automatically makes a permanent record of all
              unauthorized attempts to alter the password of a userid or
              project number.  The record includes the date and time, and the
              userid making the attempt.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         In case of an error, the return code will be the message number.
 
         OUIPAS001E "[string]" is an extraneous parameter.
         OUIPAS001E "[string]" is not a valid parameter.
         OUIPAS002E "[string]" is not an option.
         OUIPAS011E You are not authorized for this service.
         OUIPAS011E This attempt has been recorded.
         OUIPAS012E Sorry, but this transaction cannot be completed at this time.
         OUIPAS012E Try again later.
         OUIPAS013E No record found for [target].
         OUIPAS014E You are not authorized to access data for [target].
         OUIPAS014E This attempt has been recorded.
         OUIPAS016E That is not the correct password.
         OUIPAS017E Password cannot be blank.
         OUIPAS018E Password contains invalid characters.
         OUIPAS019E Passwords can be from two through eight characters long.
         OUIPAS021E New passwords don't match; try again.
         OUIPAS100E Error code [code] from an IUCV function.
         OUIPAS101E An IUCV handler already exists for service name.
                    Communication cannot be established.
         OUIPAS102E An IUCV DECLARE BUFFER has already been issued. CMS IUCV
                    support cannot be initialized.
         OUIPAS103E Service is shutting down and cannot accept requests; try
                    again later.
         OUIPAS104E IUCV message limit exceeded.
         OUIPAS105E IUCV priority messages are not allowed.
         OUIPAS106E Service is not available; try again later.
         OUIPAS107E Service is not running; try again later.
         OUIPAS108E Maximum number of IUCV connections exceeded for your
                    userid.
         OUIPAS109E No service connections are available; try again later.
         OUIPAS110E Not enough storage available.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     170
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        PASXREF
 
         Use the PASXREF command to create a cross-reference of a P8000 Pascal
         program.  PASXREF is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PASXREF   | filename                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the source program file.  The filetype of
                   this file must be "PASCAL."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The cross-reference is written into a disk file called "filename
              CROSSREF."
 
          2.  PASXREF may work with programs written for compilers other that
              AAEC P8000.  Some compilers can produce a cross-reference during
              compilation.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     171
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   PAS4C (EXEC)
 
         Use the PAS4C command to compile a program with the P4 Pascal
         compiler.  P4 Pascal is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PAS4C     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the Pascal
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PASCAL."
                   This filename will be used for the TEXT, LISTING, and
                   P4ASSEM files, if they are created.
 
         options   are PASCAL compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  PAS4C is an EXEC that uses the PASCAL command to compile a Pascal
              program.  The object program produced can be executed with the
              PAS4G command.  Refer to the description of the PASCAL command
              for more information.
 
          2.  The PAS4C command will not operate in a virtual machine smaller
              than 600K, but compiled programs can execute in smaller machines.
              You can use the STORAGE command to redefine your storage size if
              necessary.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     172
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  PAS4CG (EXEC)
 
         Use the PAS4CG command to compile and execute a program using the P4
         Pascal compiler.  P4 Pascal is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PAS4CG    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the Pascal
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PASCAL."
                   This filename will be used for the TEXT, LISTING, and
                   P4ASSEM files, if they are created.
 
         options   are PASCAL compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default P4 Pascal subroutine libraries are used: ZETALIB,
              PASLIB, and CMSLIB.  If you need to use additional libraries or
              load additional object files you must use the PAS4G command to
              execute your program.
 
          2.  The PAS4CG command will not operate in a virtual machine smaller
              than 600K.  You can use the STORAGE command to redefine your
              storage size if necessary.
 
          3.  PAS4CG is an EXEC that uses the PASCAL command to compile a
              Pascal program.  The object program produced is then executed.
              Refer to the description of the PASCAL command for more
              information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     173
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   PAS4G (EXEC)
 
         Use the PAS4G command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the P4 Pascal compiler.  P4 Pascal is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PAS4G     | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the P4
                   Pascal (or P4 Pascal compatible) object programs.  The
                   filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  ZETALIB, PASLIB, and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the executed program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the PAS4C and PASCAL commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     174
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           PEEK
 
         Use the PEEK command to examine a reader spool file with the System
         Product editor (XEDIT).  The spool file cannot be modified, but it can
         be saved as a CMS disk file, with or without modifications.  PEEK can
         be used with reader files in any format, and can be used to examine
         files sent with the NOTE and SENDFILE commands.  PEEK by default
         displays only the first 200 lines of the file (except for files in
         NETDATA or DISK DUMP format which must be displayed in their
         entirety).  This is not a complete description of the functions and
         options available.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PEEK      | [spoolid]  [( [options...] [)]]                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [FRom line]   [FOr lines]                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the file to be examined.  The
                   default is the first file in your reader.
 
         Options
 
         FRom line is the first record to be displayed.  The default is one.
 
         FOr lines is the number of records to be read from the file.
                   Specifying an asterisk causes the entire file to be read.
                   The default is to read up to 200 records.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  PEEK will use a fileid of "spoolid PEEK A0" for the file.  You
              can save the file on disk under another name by issuing the SAVE
              or FILE subcommand with a fileid (e.g., "FILE SAMPLE DATA").
 
          2.  You can use the subcommands BURN and DISCARD to purge the reader
              file and end PEEK.  Both subcommands will send an acknowledgment
              to the originating user if one was requested.
 
          3.  Files in DISK DUMP or NETDATA format are reformatted so that they
              are readable.  However, the entire file must be displayed and it
              must have a logical record length of less than 256 in order to be
              reformatted.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     175
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                            PLC
 
         Use the PLC command to run a program written in PL/I using the Cornell
         PL/CT system.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLC       | in-list [( options... [)]]                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         in-list   is a list of input sources.  This may include fileids and
                   asterisks (which indicate terminal input).  "PLC" is assumed
                   for omitted filetypes, and "*" is assumed for missing
                   filemodes.  "*DATA" and "*PROCESS" may be inserted in the
                   list to indicate the type of information to follow.  The
                   default is input from the terminal.
 
         Options
 
         In addition to the following options, options valid on the *PL/C
         statement may also be specified on the command line.
 
         DISK      causes all output to be written into a disk file named "PLC
                   LISTING".  TERM is the default.
 
         NOSAVE    inhibits saving of source listing lines.
 
         PAUSE     to have your program enter debug mode just prior to program
                   execution.  It is equivalent to pressing "ATTN" just as
                   program execution begins (which is hard to do).  This will
                   give you the opportunity to set PAUSEs in the program prior
                   to execution.
 
         SAVE n    to have PL/CT save a copy of the source listing for display
                   during execution.  Only the first n lines will be saved; if
                   omitted, n defaults to 100.  This feature uses extra
                   storage.
 
         TERM      causes all output to be sent to the terminal.  This is the
                   default.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to PL/CT - User's Guide to the CMS Version (available from the
         MANUAL command) for more information.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     176
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                   PLIC
 
         Use the PLIC command to compile and execute a program with the OS PL/I
         Checkout Compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLIC      | filename [ft [fm]]  [( [options] [/ parameters] [)]]   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the primary input file.
 
         ft        is the filetype of the input file.  The default is "PLI" or
                   "PLIOPT."
 
         fm        is the filemode.  The default is "*."
 
         options   are PL/I Checkout options.
 
         parameters
                   is a character string that is passed to the main procedure
                   of the PL/I program when it is executed.  It is truncated to
                   100 characters and broken into 8-character tokens.
 
         PL/I Checkout Subcommands
 
         ABOVE                Set breakpoints, insert debugging code
         AT                   Set breakpoints, insert debugging code
         CHANGE               Change text in source or logic unit
         CMS                  Enter CMS subset to execute CMS commands
         CORRECT              Make syntax corrections
         COUNT                Count statement executions
         DELETE               Remove text from source
         EDIT                 Enter edit mode
         END                  End edit mode
         ERASE                Remove source statements
         FIND                 Find text in source or logical unit
         GO                   Continue processing
         GROUP                Create logical unit
         HELP                 Help information
         INCREMENT            Specify increment between statements
         insert/replace       Insert or replace source code
         LIST                 Type source code, mods, logical units
         LISTCOUNT            Type the count information
         MONITOR              Copy file output to the terminal
         NOCOUNT              End counting
         NOMONITOR            End monitoring
         NOVERIFY             End verifying
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     177
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                   PLIC
 
         OFF                  Remove breakpoints
         OPTIONS              Change or examine compiler options
         QUALIFY              Change scope of immediate input
         REFERENCE            Obtain attributes, cross reference
         RENUMBER             Renumber the source
         RESUME               Continue processing
         RETRANSLATE          Retranslate and execute
         SAVE                 Save current version as a CMS file
         STEP                 Specify number of statements to execute
         VERIFY               Have effects of CHANGE, CORRECT, DELETE,
                              and FIND typed at the terminal
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  For more information about the PL/I Checkout Compiler, see the OS
              PL/I Checkout Compiler CMS User's Guide.  A summary is available
              online from the MANUAL command.
 
          2.  Use the PLICR command to execute a program previously compiled
              with either the Checkout or Optimizing compiler.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     178
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                                  PLICR
 
         Use the PLICR command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the PL/I Checkout or Optimizing compiler.  PLICR uses the Checkout
         debugging facilities.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLICR     | filename [filename...] [( [options] [/ parameters] [)]]|
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is one or more filenames of TEXT files produced by the PL/I
                   Checkout or Optimizing compiler.
 
         options   are PL/I Checkout options.
 
         parameters
                   is a character string that is passed to the main procedure
                   of the PL/I program when it is executed.  It is truncated to
                   100 characters and broken into 8-character tokens.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  PLICR provides the same subcommands as the PLIC command.
 
          2.  For more information about the PL/I Checkout Compiler, see the OS
              PL/I Checkout Compiler CMS User's Guide.  A summary is available
              online from the MANUAL command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     179
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
         Use the PLIOPT command to compile a program with the IBM PL/I
         Optimizing Compiler.  The PLIXCG, PLIXC, and PLIXG commands are
         available for use with PL/I programs.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLIOPT    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the PL/I
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PLI" or
                   "PLIOPT."  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         Options
 
         A [(FULL|SHORT)]
                   controls the production of an attribute listing.  NA is the
                   default.
 
         AG        causes the production of an aggregate length table.  NAG is
                   the default.
 
         CHARSET ([48|60] [EBCDIC|BCD])
                   specifies the character set used in the source program.
                   Refer to the PL/I User's Guide for more information.  The
                   default is CHARSET(60 EBCDIC).
 
         Compile   causes the compiler to continue unless an unrecoverable
                   error is encountered.  NC(S) is the default.
 
         CONTROL ('password')
                   allows deleted options to be specified.  Refer to the PL/I
                   User's Guide for more information.
 
         COUNT     causes code to be generated that will count the times each
                   statement is executed.  COUNT implies GONUMBER or GOSTMT.
                   NOCOUNT is the default.
 
         CS        is the same as CHARSET.
 
         CT        is the same as COUNT.
 
         Deck      causes the object program to be sent to the virtual punch.
                   NODECK is the default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     180
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
         DIsk      causes the compiler listing to be written into a file named
                   "filename LISTING".  This is the default.
 
         DUmp      causes a dump to be produced if the compiler terminates
                   abnormally.  NODUMP is the default.
 
         ESD       causes an external symbol dictionary to be produced.  NOESD
                   is the default.
 
         Flag [(I|W|E|S)]
                   indicates the level of diagnostic messages to be produced.
                   FLAG (W), the default, allows warning, error, and severe
                   error messages to be produced.  FLAG (E) allows only error
                   and severe error messages.  FLAG (S) allows only severe
                   error messages.  FLAG (I) allows informational messages to
                   be produced along with all other classes.
 
         FLOW [(n m)]
                   controls the tracing of flow of control during execution.
                   The two arguments specify the number of transfers of control
                   that will be listed for statements and for procedures.
                   NOFLOW is the default.
 
         GONUMBER  causes source program statement numbers to be included in
                   execution-time messages.  GONUMBER implies the NUMBER
                   option.  NGN is the default.
 
         GOSTMT    is similar to GONUMBER, but implies the STMT option.  NGS is
                   the default.
 
         IMP       generates extra code to correctly handle imprecise
                   interruptions on IBM 360/91, 360/195, and 370/195
                   processors.  NIMP is the default.
 
         INClude   allows %INCLUDE statements to appear in the source program
                   without the overhead of the full preprocessor.  The MACRO
                   option overrides INCLUDE.  NINC is the default.
 
         INSOURCE  causes a source listing (including preprocessor statements)
                   to be generated.  This only applies when MACRO is specified.
                   This is the default.
 
         INT       allows ATTENTION on-units to function.  NINT is the default.
 
         LC (n)    indicates the number of lines on each page of compiler
                   listing output (ranging from 1 to 32767).  The default is LC
                   (55).
 
         LIST [(m n)]
                   causes the generated object code to be listed.  A range of
                   statement numbers may be specified with "m" and "n."  NOLIST
                   is the default.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     181
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
         LMESSAGE  causes long-form messages to be produced.  SMESSAGE is the
                   default.
 
         Macro     causes the preprocessor to be used.  NOMACRO is the default.
 
         MAP       causes a storage map to be generated.  NOMAP is the default.
 
         MARGINI ('c')
                   causes the margins to be marked in the listing with the
                   specified character.  NMI is the default.
 
         MARgins (l r [c])
                   are the left and right margins on source records.  The third
                   parameter is the column that contains ANS carriage control
                   characters.  The default for source files with fixed-length
                   records is MARGINS (2 72 1); for files with variable-length
                   records the default is MARGINS (10 100 0).
 
         MDeck     causes the output of the preprocessor to be sent to the
                   virtual punch.  NOMDECK is the default.
 
         NA        See the A (attributes) option.
 
         NAG       See the AG (aggregate) option.
 
         NAME ('name')
                   causes the object program to be assigned the specified name.
                   Names are limited to six characters.  There is no default
                   value.
 
         NC [(W|E|S)]
                   causes compilation to stop if a warning, error, or severe
                   error is detected.  NC (S) is the default.  Also see the
                   COMPILE option.
 
         NEST      causes nesting levels to be indicated on the listing.
                   NONEST is the default.
 
         NONUMBER  See the NUMBER option.
 
         NOOBJECT  See the OBJECT option.
 
         NOPRInt   suppresses the compiler listing.  DISK is the default.
 
         NOPT      See the OPTIMIZE option.
 
         NSEQ      See the SEQUENCE option.
 
         NSYN [(W|E|S)]
                   causes syntax checking to stop if a warning, error, or
                   severe error is detected.  NSYN (S) is the default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     182
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
         NTERM     suppresses output to the terminal during compilation.
 
         NUMber    causes sequence numbers on the source records to be used as
                   statement numbers.  This is the default.  Also see the
                   SEQUENCE option.
 
         OBJect [(filename)]
                   causes the object program to be written to a disk file named
                   "filename TEXT".  The default filename is the filename of
                   the source file.  OBJECT is the default.
 
         OFfset    causes a table of offsets to be produced.  NOOFFSET is the
                   default.
 
         OPTimize (TIME|0|2)
                   specifies the optimization level (0 or 2).  TIME is the same
                   as 2.  The default is OPTIMIZE (0), which is the same as
                   NOOPTIMIZE.
 
         OPtions   causes a complete list of options to be included in the
                   compiler listing.  NOP is the default.
 
         OSDeck    specifies that the object program will be executed under OS
                   rather than CMS.
 
         PRInt     causes the compiler listing to be sent to the virtual
                   printer.  DISK is the default.
 
         SEQuence (m n)
                   specifies that sequence numbers are included on source
                   program records.  The default for source files with fixed-
                   length records is SEQUENCE (73 80); for files with variable-
                   length records the default is SEQUENCE (1 8).
 
         SIZE (n|nK|MAX)
                    controls the use of storage by the compiler.  The default,
                   SIZE (MAX), should be used.
 
         SMESSAGE  causes short-form messages to be produced.  This is the
                   default.
 
         Source    causes the source program to be included in the compiler
                   listing.  NOSOURCE is the default.
 
         STMT      causes the actual statement numbers rather than input
                   sequence numbers to be used to number statements.  NOSTMT is
                   the default.  STMT is implied by NONUMBER and GOSTMT.
 
         STORAGE   causes storage requirements to be included in the compiler
                   listing.  NSTG is the default.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     183
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
         SYNtax    causes the compiler to continue syntax checking unless an
                   unrecoverable error is encountered.  NSYN (S) is the
                   default.
 
         TERMinal [(options)]
                   is used to direct output from selected options to the
                   terminal.  The default is to display diagnostic messages.
 
         TYpe      causes the compiler listing to be directed to the terminal.
                   DISK is the default.
 
         Xref [(FULL|SHORT)]
                   causes a cross-reference to be generated.  XREF(SHORT)
                   causes unreferenced identifiers to be omitted.  NOXREF is
                   the default.
 
         Usage Note
 
          1.  Detailed information about using the PL/I Optimizer can be found
              in the OS PL/I Optimizing Compiler: CMS User's Guide.  The PL/I
              language is described in the OS and DOS PL/I Language Reference
              Manual.
 
          2.  If you use %INCLUDE statements in your PL/I program, you must
              define the libraries to be searched before you issue the PLIOPT
              command.  Members to be copied may be in CMS MACLIB's or OS
              partitioned data sets (or both).  To use a CMS MACLIB, use the
              following command:
 
                   GLOBAL MACLIB libname
 
              You must specify either INCLUDE or MACRO on the PLIOPT command.
              If you use the form "%INCLUDE libname member" rather than
              "%INCLUDE member," you must also issue a FILEDEF:
 
                   FILEDEF libname DISK libname MACLIB *
                   GLOBAL MACLIB libname
 
              Refer to the description of the GLOBAL and MACLIB commands for
              more information.
 
          3.  Before loading your PL/I program, you must define any subroutine
              libraries required (including the PL/I Optimizer library).  For
              example:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB PLILIB
                   LOAD filename ( START
 
              The PL/I standard files SYSIN, SYSPRINT, and PLIDUMP are defined
              by the PL/I run-time system.  SYSIN and SYSPRINT are assigned to
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     184
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLIOPT
 
              the terminal, and PLIDUMP is assigned to the printer.  If your
              program performs any input or output operations with other files
              you must use FILEDEF commands to define the files or devices to
              be used before execution.
 
          4.  You can create modules from PL/I programs using the following
              commands:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB PLILIB
                   LOAD filename
                   GENMOD name ( FROM PLISTART
 
              The FROM PLISTART option must be specified on the GENMOD command.
              Since some library routines are loaded dynamically, the PLILIB
              TXTLIB must be available when the module is executed.
 
          5.  Parameters can be passed from the command line to the PL/I run-
              time environment and to the PL/I program with the START command:
 
                   GLOBAL TXTLIB PLILIB
                   LOAD filename
                   START * execution-time options / program parameters
 
              All blanks are removed from the parameters before they are passed
              to the program.  The execution-time options are described in the
              PL/I User's Guide.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     185
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   PLIXC (EXEC)
 
         Use the PLIXC command to compile a program with the IBM PL/I
         Optimizing compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLIXC     | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the PL/I
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PLI" or
                   "PLIOPT."  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         options   are PLIOPT compiler options.
 
         Usage Note
 
         PLIXC is an EXEC that uses the PLIOPT command to compile a PL/I
         program.  The object program produced can be executed with the PLIXG
         command.  Refer to the description of the PLIOPT command for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     186
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  PLIXCG (EXEC)
 
         Use the PLIXCG command to compile and execute a program using the IBM
         PL/I Optimizing compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLIXCG    | filename [( options... [)]]                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the CMS disk file containing the PL/I
                   source program.  The filetype of the file must be "PLI" or
                   "PLIOPT."  This filename will be used for the TEXT and
                   LISTING files, if they are created.
 
         options   are PLIOPT compiler options.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The default PL/I Optimizer subroutine libraries are used: PLILIB
              and CMSLIB.  If you need to use additional libraries or load
              additional object files you must use the PLIXG command to execute
              your program.
 
          2.  PLIXCG is an EXEC that uses the PLIOPT command to compile a PL/I
              program.  The object program produced is then executed.  Refer to
              the description of the PLIOPT command for more information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     187
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                   PLIXG (EXEC)
 
         Use the PLIXG command to execute a program previously compiled with
         the IBM PL/I Optimizing compiler.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PLIXG     | filename [filename...] [( [libraries] [> parms] ]      |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  are the filenames of the CMS disks file containing the PL/I
                   Optimizer (or PL/I Optimizer compatible) object programs.
                   The filetypes of the files must be "TEXT."
 
         libraries are the names of subroutine libraries (TXTLIB's).  Any
                   libraries specified here are searched before the default
                   libraries:  PLILIB and CMSLIB.
 
         parms     are command line parameters for the PL/I execution
                   environment and the executed program.  Use a "/" to mark the
                   start of the parameters for the program.
 
         Usage Note
 
         Refer to the descriptions of the PLIXC and PLIOPT commands for more
         information.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     188
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           PLOT
 
         Use the PLOT command to send a CMS disk file containing Zeta Graphic
         Machine Language (GML) instructions to be plotted on the Zeta plotter
         in the UKCC Computer Room.  The GML data file may be produced with the
         standard plotting subroutines.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         | PLOT      | |fn   |ft   |fm|||  [(options... [)]]                  |
         |           | |LAST |PLOT |* |||                                     |
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +         +                                            |
         |           | |Zeta     |                                            |
         |           | |Type     |                                            |
         |           | |Terminal |                                            |
         |           | |TO userid|                                            |
         |           | +         +                                            |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        specifies the filename of a file to be plotted.  "LAST" is
                   the default.
 
         ft        specifies the filetype of the file.  "PLOT" is the default.
 
         fm        specifies the filemode of the file.  "*" is the default.
 
         Options
 
         Terminal  is a synonym for TYPE.
 
         TO userid sends the data to a user rather than plotting.
 
         Type      displays the data at the terminal rather than plotting.
 
         Zeta      sends the data to be plotted on the Zeta plotter at the UK
                   Computing Center.  This is the default.  Plotter output may
                   be picked up at the UKCC Data Center. (The runid is required
                   to claim output.)
 
         PLOT Control Statements
 
         Control statements must be in uppercase and begin in column one.
 
          ..*      is a comment.  PLOT discards this line.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     189
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           PLOT
 
          ..END    marks the end of the data in a file.  PLOT will not read
                   past this point in the file.
 
          ..EOF    is the same as END.
 
          ..INClude fn [ft [fm]]
                   includes another file in the output.  The default filetype
                   and filemode are taken from the including file.  The
                   specified file is inserted into the output at the point
                   where the INCLUDE statement is found.  The CMS disk files
                   are not altered.  This is used to combine several plots in
                   separate CMS disk files into a single plotted output.
 
          ..READ   reads a single line from your terminal when the statement is
                   encountered.  The data read from the terminal is discarded.
 
          ..TYPE text
                   displays the text at your terminal.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Data from the input files is truncated to 80 characters.  The
              Zeta plotter uses only the first 64 characters of each line.
 
          2.  More information about plotting at the University of Kentucky
              Computing Center can be found in the UKCC Plotting Manual (Third
              Edition), available at the University Bookstore in the Student
              Center on the Lexington campus.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSPLT002E Input file "fileid" not found.  RC=28
         DMSPLT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT029E Missing parameter for the name option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT070E "name" is not a parameter.  RC=24
         DMSPLT104S Error n reading file "fileid".  RC=100
         DMSPLT911E Include statement in error:  RC=99
         DMSPLT946E I/O error (code n) writing to punch.  RC=100
         DMSPLT984E Attempt to include an included file from "fileid".  RC=24
 
         Messages will also be sent by the plotting system to acknowledge
         receipt of your file.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     190
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLOTAJ
 
         Use the PLOTAJ command to draw a plot on an Anderson Jacobson 832 or
         833 terminal with the Ultraplot option.  The input file must contain
         Zeta Graphic Machine Language (GML) instructions, as produced by the
         standard plotting subroutines.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         | PLOTAJ    | |fn   |ft   |fm||| [( options... [)]]                  |
         |           | |LAST |PLOT |* |||                                     |
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
       | |           | [Xstart x]   [Ystart y]   [Height h]                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        specifies the filename of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "LAST" will be assumed.
 
         ft        specifies the filetype of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "PLOT" will be assumed.
 
         fm        specifies the filemode of the file to be plotted.  If
                   omitted, the default value is "*".
 
         Options
 
         The XSTART, YSTART, and HEIGHT options may be specified, but are
         ignored.  These options are supported by the PLOTHP and PLOTTEK
         commands.  No clipping is done by PLOTAJ.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  If you are using an Anderson Jacobson 833 terminal you should
              issue the AJ833 command before using PLOTAJ.
 
          2.  The data file may contain either fixed-length or variable-length
              records.  Only the first 64 characters of each record will be
              used.
 
          3.  The plotted output may be interrupted with the HT and HX
              commands, but doing so will leave the terminal in plot mode.
              Type ESC (escape) N to return to normal mode.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     191
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLOTAJ
 
          4.  More information about plotting at the University of Kentucky
              Computing Center may be found in the UKCC Plotting Manual (Third
              Edition), available at the University Bookstore in the Student
              Center on the Lexington campus.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSPLT002E File "fileid" does not exist.  RC=28
         DMSPLT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT029E Invalid value "value" in the name option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT069E Disk "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSPLT070E "name" is an extraneous parameter.  RC=24
         DMSPLT938E Error n from FILEDEF.  RC=n
         DMSPLY988I PLOTAJ starting...
         DMSPLY989I PLOTAJ finished: Min X=n Max X=n Min Y=n Max Y=n
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     192
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLOTHP
 
         Use the PLOTHP command to draw a plot on a Hewlett Packard 2647a
         graphics terminal.  The input file must contain Zeta Graphic Machine
         Language (GML) instructions, as produced by the standard plotting
         subroutines.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         | PLOTHP    | |fn   |ft   |fm||| [( options... [)]]                  |
         |           | |LAST |PLOT |* |||                                     |
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
       | |           | [Xstart x]   [Ystart y]   [Height h]                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        specifies the filename of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "LAST" will be assumed.
 
         ft        specifies the filetype of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "PLOT" will be assumed.
 
         fm        specifies the filemode of the file to be plotted.  If
                   omitted, the default value is "*".
 
         Options
 
       | Height h  gives the length that will be scaled to fit the height of
                   the screen.  Vectors above YSTART+HEIGHT or to the right of
                   XSTART+2*HEIGHT will be clipped.  If not specified, +12.0 is
                   assumed.
 
       | Xstart x  specifies the minimum X value to be plotted.  Vectors to the
                   left of this value will be clipped.  If not specified, 0.0
                   is used.
 
       | Ystart y  specifies the minimum Y value to be plotted.  Vectors below
                   this value will be clipped.  If not specified, 0.0 is used.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The data file may contain either fixed or variable-length
              records.  Only the first 64 characters of each record will be
              used.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     193
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         PLOTHP
 
          2.  XSTART, YSTART, and HEIGHT should be specified in inches.
              Together they define the clipping window.  The default values
              will draw a section of the plot 12 inches high by 24 inches wide
              on the screen.  If the plot is longer than this, use the XSTART
              option to view the next section (e.g., XSTART 24).
 
          3.  More information about plotting at the University of Kentucky
              Computing Center may be found in the UKCC Plotting Manual (Third
              Edition), available at the University Bookstore in the Student
              Center on the Lexington campus.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSPLT002E File "fileid" does not exist.  RC=28
         DMSPLT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT029E Invalid value "value" in the name option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT069E Disk "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSPLT070E "name" is an extraneous parameter.  RC=24
         DMSPLT938E Error n from FILEDEF.  RC=n
         DMSPLY988I PLOTHP starting...
         DMSPLY989I PLOTHP finished: Min X=n Max X=n Min Y=n Max Y=n
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     194
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        PLOTTEK
 
         Use the PLOTTEK command to draw a plot on a Tektronix graphics
         terminal.  The input file must contain Zeta Graphic Machine Language
         (GML) instructions, as produced by the standard plotting subroutines.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         | PLOTTEK   | |fn   |ft   |fm||| [( options... [)]]                  |
         |           | |LAST |PLOT |* |||                                     |
         |           | +     +     +  +++                                     |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
       | |           | [Xstart x]   [Ystart y]   [Height h]                   |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        specifies the filename of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "LAST" will be assumed.
 
         ft        specifies the filetype of the file to be plotted.  If not
                   specified, "PLOT" will be assumed.
 
         fm        specifies the filemode of the file to be plotted.  If
                   omitted, the default value is "*".
 
         Options
 
       | Height h  gives the length that will be scaled to fit the height of
                   the screen.  Vectors above YSTART+HEIGHT or to the right of
                   XSTART+1.31*HEIGHT will be clipped.  If not specified, +12.0
                   will be used.
 
       | Xstart x  specifies the minimum X value to be plotted.  Vectors to the
                   left of this value will be clipped.  If not specified, 0.0
                   is used.
 
       | Ystart y  specifies the minimum Y value to be plotted.  Vectors below
                   this value will be clipped.  If not specified, 0.0 is used.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The data file may contain either fixed or variable-length
              records.  Only the first 64 characters of each record will be
              used.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     195
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        PLOTTEK
 
          2.  XSTART, YSTART, and HEIGHT should be specified in inches.
              Together they define the clipping window.  The default values
              will draw a section of the plot 12 inches high by 15.72 inches
              wide on the screen.  If the plot is longer than this, use the
              XSTART option to view the next section (e.g., XSTART 15.73).
 
          3.  At the end of the plot, PLOTTEK will sound the alarm, then
              "sleep" until RETURN is pressed.  It will then print the
              termination message and exit.
 
          4.  More information about plotting at the University of Kentucky
              Computing Center may be found in the UKCC Plotting Manual (Third
              Edition), available at the University Bookstore in the Student
              Center on the Lexington campus.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSPLT002E File "fileid" does not exist.  RC=28
         DMSPLT003E "name" is not a valid option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT029E Invalid value "value" in the name option.  RC=24
         DMSPLT069E Disk "mode" not accessed.  RC=36
         DMSPLT070E "name" is an extraneous parameter.  RC=24
         DMSPLT938E Error n from FILEDEF.  RC=n
         DMSPLY988I PLOTTEK starting...
         DMSPLY989I PLOTTEK finished: Min X=n Max X=n Min Y=n Max Y=n
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     196
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  PRHELP (EXEC)
 
         Use the PRHELP command to generate a printer spool file from a CMS
         HELP file.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PRHELP    | topic                                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         topic     is the HELP file to be printed.  It is specified exactly the
                   same as for the HELP command.
 
         Usage Note
 
         The SETPRT command should be issued before you use PRHELP, to set the
         destination and attributes of the printed output.  For example:
 
              SETPRT FORMS NT
              PRHELP topic
 
         will cause the HELP file to be printed in the UKCC Computer Room using
         narrow, unlined paper.  A group of files could be printed together by
         issuing the commands:
 
              SETPRT GROUP
              PRHELP first
              PRHELP second
               .
               .
               .
              SETPRT ENDGROUP FORMS NT
              SETPRT
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
       | Messages may be produced by the CMS commands STATE, EXECIO, and PRINT.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     197
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          PRINT
 
         Use the PRINT command to generate a printer spool file from a CMS disk
         file.  This is only a summary of the most frequently needed options
         and functions of the PRINT command, not a complete description.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                   +        +                           |
         | PRINT     | filename filetype |filemode|  [( [options...] [)]]     |
         |           |                   |A       |                           |
         |           |                   +        +                           |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +    +                                                 |
         |           | |NOCC|                                                 |
         |           | |CC  |                                                 |
         |           | +    +                                                 |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the file to be printed.
 
         filetype  is the filetype of the file to be printed.
 
         filemode  is the filemode of the file to be printed.  The default is
                   "A."
 
         Options
 
         CC        causes the first character of each record from the file to
       |           be interpreted as a carriage control character (see the
       |           Usage Notes).  CC is the default if the filetype is
                   "LISTING."
 
         NOCC      will not use carriage control information from the file.
                   The PRINT command will control spacing and will print page
                   headings for each file printed.  NOCC is the default unless
                   the filetype is "LISTING."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The CMS SETPRT command should be issued before the PRINT command
              to set routing and other options.  For example, to print a file
              on the UKCC hands-on (HOT) printer, enter the commands:
 
                   SETPRT ROUTE HOT
                   PRINT a file
 
          2.  A group of files can be printed together with the commands:
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     198
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          PRINT
 
                   SETPRT GROUP
                   PRINT first file
                   PRINT second file
                    ...
                   SETPRT ENDGROUP CLOSE SPACE W ROUTE HOT
                   SETPRT
 
              The "SPACE W" option causes each file to begin on a new listing
       |      page.  Groups of files may also be printed with the aid of the
       |      LISTFILE or LISTX "EXEC" option.  These commands would print all
              files modified since the beginning of 1981:
 
                   SETPRT GROUP
                   LISTX ( FROM 01/01/81 EXEC
                   CMS PRINT
                   SETPRT ENDGROUP SPACE W ROUTE HOT
                   SETPRT
 
              Note that any SETPRT options specified with the GROUP option are
              overridden when SETPRT is later issued with the ENDGROUP option.
 
          3.  Both American National Standard (ANS) and IBM machine carriage
              control characters are allowed.  Invalid carriage control
              characters have unpredictable results.  The following are valid
              ANS control characters under CMS:
 
              Graphic  Hex Value  Meaning
              [blank]     40      Space 1 line before printing.
                 0        F0      Space 2 lines before printing.
                 -        60      Space 3 lines before printing.
                 +        4E      Space no lines before printing (overprint).
                 1        F1      Skip to channel 1 before printing (new page).
 
          4.  PRINT has additional options and functions.  Refer to the VM/SP
              CMS Command and Macro Reference or online HELP for details.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     199
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  PUBLIC (EXEC)
 
       | Use the PUBLIC command to link and access the Public disk.  After you
         have issued the PUBLIC command, you may issue "HELP PUBLIC MENU" for a
         list of things available on the disk.  Nothing on the Public disk is
         supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PUBLIC    | [mode]                                                 |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         mode      is the mode used to access the Public disk.  The default
                   mode is "Z."  The mode may be specified as with the ACCESS
                   command.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The Public disk contains EXEC's, XEDIT macros, and other
              contributions from users.  Items on the Public disk are not
              subjected to extensive testing by the UKCC, and the UKCC will not
              provide any support for them.  You should evaluate an item before
              using it.  Each item on the Public disk is required to have a
              Help file which will identify the contributor.  The contributor
              should be contacted if you have suggestions or complaints about
              an item.  Contact the User Services Group at the UKCC for
              information on contributing to the Public disk.
 
          2.  If it is present, the PUBLIC MEMO is typed at the terminal by the
              PUBLIC command.  The PUBLIC MEMO is used to alert you to
              important information about the Public disk.
 
          3.  If you regularly use files on the Public disk you may want to
              have it accessed automatically when you log on.  This can be done
              by placing "EXEC PUBLIC" in your PROFILE EXEC.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Messages may be issued by the ACCESS command.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     200
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                             PW
 
         Use the PW command to run a program with Waterloo Pascal.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | PW        | [-D] filename                                          |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         -D        indicates that the interactive debugger is to be used.  When
                   this is specified the interactive debugger will take control
                   immediately before your program begins execution.  The
                   subcommands supported by this facility are listed in the
                   Usage Notes.
 
         filename  is the filename of the input file.  The filetype of this
                   file must be "PASCAL."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Refer to the Waterloo Pascal User's Guide and Language
              Description (available from the MANUAL command) for more
              information.
 
          2.  The interactive debugger supports the following subcommands (only
              the first letter of each subcommand need be entered):
 
                   Breakpoint List
                   Breakpoint Reset [id]
                   Breakpoint Set [line-range | routine | *]
                   Display [variable | *]
                   Go
                   Help
                   Quit
                   Single Reset
                   Single Set
                   Trace List
                   Trace Reset [id]
                   Trace Set [line-range | routine | *]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     201
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          P8000
 
         Use the P8000 command to compile a program using the AAEC P8000 Pascal
         compiler.  P8000 is not supported.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | P8000     | filename [(options... [)]]                             |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the filename of the input file.  The filetype of this
                   file must be "PASCAL."
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Execution requires the following libraries:
 
                   P8000 FORTLIB FORTEEH TSOLIB CMSLIB
 
          2.  No additional information is available at this time.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     202
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                             QUERY (CMS and CP)
 
         Use the QUERY command to gather information about your userid and the
         setting of various options.  There are distinct CMS and CP QUERY
         commands, but the CMS QUERY command will pass unrecognized parameters
         to the CP QUERY command if IMPCP is ON.  In most cases QUERY can be
         considered to be a CMS command.  This description includes the most
         often needed parameters of both commands.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | Query     | function [( option [)]]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | CP Functions:               CMS Functions:             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Files                       ABBREV                     |
         |           | Links address               DISK [*|mode|R+W|MAX]      |
         |           | LOGmsg                      FILEDEF                    |
       | |           | Names                       IMMEDIATe                  |
         |           | PF[nn]                      IMPCP                      |
       | |           | RATE                        IMPEX                      |
         |           | Rdr [ALL]                   INPUT                      |
         |           | Reader [ALL]                OUTPUT                     |
         |           | Set                         SEARCH                     |
         |           | TERMinal                    SYNONYM [SYSTEM|USER|ALL]  |
         |           | Time                                                   |
         |           | USERID                                                 |
         |           | Users [userid]                                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +                 +                                    |
         |           | |STACK [FIFO|LIFO]|                                    |
         |           | |FIFO             |                                    |
         |           | |LIFO             |                                    |
         |           | +                 +                                    |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         (Each function is marked "CMS" or "CP" to indicate the command used.)
 
         ABBREV    (CMS) checks whether abbreviations are accepted for CMS
                   command names.  The initial setting is "ON".  This is
                   controlled with the SET ABBREV command.
 
         DISK [*|mode|R/W|MAX]
                   (CMS) displays information about accessed minidisks.  The
                   default (*) is to display all accessed minidisks.  You may
                   specify a single access mode letter, "R/W" (for all writable
                   minidisks), or "MAX" (for the writable minidisk with the
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     203
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                             QUERY (CMS and CP)
 
                   most available space).  The ACCESS command is used to
                   control the accessibility of minidisks.
 
         FILEDEF   (CMS) displays information about file definitions made with
                   the FILEDEF command.
 
         Files     (CP) displays the number of spool files owned by your
                   userid.
 
         IMMEDIATE (CMS) checks whether the CMS immediate commands (HT, HX,
                   etc.)  will be recognized.  The initial setting is "ON".
                   This is controlled with the SET IMMEDIATE command.
 
         IMPCP     (CMS) checks whether commands not recognized by CMS are
                   implied to be CP commands.  The initial setting is "ON".
                   When IMPCP is off, CP commands must be prefixed with "CP",
                   or be issued from the CP environment.  CP commands in an
                   EXEC file must be prefixed by "CP" regardless of the IMPCP
                   setting (except for QUERY with a stacking option specified).
                   IMPCP is controlled with the SET IMPCP command.
 
         IMPEX     (CMS) checks whether all commands are implied to be EXEC
                   names.  The initial setting is "ON".  When IMPEX is off,
                   EXEC names must be prefixed with "EXEC".  Regardless of the
                   IMPEX setting, all EXEC names must be prefixed with "EXEC"
                   when called from another EXEC.  IMPCP is controlled with the
                   SET IMPCP command.
 
         INPUT     (CMS) displays any input translations in effect.  The
                   initial setting is to have no input translations.  This is
                   controlled with the SET INPUT command.
 
         Links address
                   (CP) displays the userids that currently have links to your
                   minidisk with virtual device address "address".  Other users
                   use the LINK command to link to your minidisks.  You use the
                   AUTOLINK command to authorize and control these links.
 
         LOGmsg    (CP) displays the current system log messages.  These
                   messages are set by the system support staff to announce
                   system changes and specially scheduled down-time.  A very
                   brief summary of the current log messages is displayed at
                   your terminal each time you log on or reconnect to the
                   system.  The log message will be empty if there are no
                   announcements.  The NEWS command displays this information
                   in a more useful form.
 
       | Names     (CP) displays a list of all logged-on users along with the
       |           addresses (real or logical) of their terminals.
       |           Disconnected users are indicated by DSC.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     204
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                             QUERY (CMS and CP)
 
         OUTPUT    (CMS) displays any existing output translations.  The
                   initial setting is no output translations.  This is
                   controlled with the CASE and SET OUTPUT commands.
 
         PF[nn]    (CP) displays the current setting of the Program Function
                   keys, or a single specified PF key.  All undefined PF keys
                   will function as if set to the RETRIEVE command.  Only
                   3270-type and 3101 terminals have PF keys that are supported
                   by VM/SP.  PF keys are set with the SET PFnn command.
 
       | RATE      (CP) displays the current rate period: DAY, NIGHT, WEEKEND,
       |           or HOLIDAY.  Additional text (like the name of a holiday)
       |           may follow the rate indicator.  The RATES command displays
       |           the rate period and the rate actually charged.
 
         Reader [ALL]
         Rdr [ALL] (CP) displays a list of reader spool files.  The ALL
                   parameter causes more extensive information to be displayed
                   for each file.
 
         SEARCH    (CMS) displays the accessed minidisks in the search order.
                   This information is a subset of that displayed by the QUERY
                   DISK command.
 
         Set       (CP) displays the current values of the CP SET command.
 
         SYNONYM [SYSTEM|USER|ALL]
                   (CMS) displays the defined CMS command synonyms.  Synonyms
                   may be defined with the SYNONYM command.
 
         TERMinal  (CP) displays the current setting of the CP TERMINAL
                   command.
 
         Time      (CP) displays the current date and time (Lexington, Kentucky
                   local time).
 
         USERID    (CP) displays your userid and the node name of the computer
                   system (if a node name has been assigned).
 
         Users [userid]
                   (CP) displays either the number of users logged on to the
                   system, or the current status of a particular userid.
 
         Options:
 
         Options are accepted by the CMS QUERY command, but not by the CP QUERY
         command.  However, if the parameters are passed to CP by the CMS QUERY
         command the options will be honored.
 
         FIFO      is a synonym for STACK FIFO.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     205
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                             QUERY (CMS and CP)
 
         LIFO      is a synonym for STACK LIFO.
 
         STACK [FIFO|LIFO]
                   stacks the responses from the QUERY command (rather than
                   typing them).  Error messages are never stacked and are
                   typed even if STACK is specified.  The default stacking
                   order is FIFO.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  Only one function may be specified.
 
          2.  The QUERY command must be prefixed by "CP" to use the CP QUERY
              functions from an EXEC, unless a STACK option is specified and
              SET IMPCP is ON.
 
          3.  Both the CP and CMS QUERY commands have additional functions.
              For more information refer to the VM/SP CP Command Reference for
              General Users, the VM/SP CMS Command and Macro Reference, or
              online HELP.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         Messages may be produced by either the CP or the CMS QUERY command.
         If the command is processed by CP, the return code is set to either
         zero or the message number of the error message issued.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     206
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          RATES
 
         Use the RATES command to obtain the current rate period and rates.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RATEs     | [(  [Type] [Stack] [)]]                                |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Options
 
         Type      specifies that the rate data is to be typed on the terminal.
                   This is the default.
 
         Stack     specifies that the rate data is to be placed on the console
                   stack in a last in, first out order.
 
         Usage Note
 
         When the STACK option is specified a single line containing five items
         is stacked:
 
           +                                    +
         * |Internal [day|night|holiday|weekend]|  cpurate  iorate
           |External base                       |
           +                                    +
 
         The CPU rate is specified as dollars (and cents) per virtual CPU hour;
         the I/O rate is dollars (and cents) per 1000 I/O operations.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSRAT003E "string" is not a valid option.  RC=24
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     207
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        RBROWSE
 
         Use the RBROWSE command to examine a reader spool file from a
         3270-type display terminal.  RBROWSE is a read-only editor based on
         the BROWSE command and supports a similar set of subcommands.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RBrowse   | [spoolid] [( [options...] [)]]                         |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Help fn]  [Profile [([fn [ft [fm [)]]]]]]             |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | [Noclear]                                              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader spool file to be
                   examined.  If this parameter is not specified the first file
                   in the reader will be used.
 
         Options
 
         Help fn   specifies the name of an EXEC to be called by the /HELP
                   subcommand.  The default name is "HRBROWSE."
 
         Profile (fn ft fm)
                   specifies a file to be used as the RBROWSE  profile.  The
                   default is "RBROWSE $PROFILE *."
 
         Noclear   suppresses clearing the screen on entry to RBROWSE.
 
         Usage Notes
 
         RBROWSE supports an RBROWSE $PROFILE, subcommands, and keyboard
         functions like the BROWSE command.  RBROWSE does not have DICT, ENTER,
         and MEMBER subcommands.  It allows PURGE as a synonym for BURN.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         RBROWSE does not issue error messages, but uses these return codes:
 
            1  Console not a 3270-type terminal.
            2  Insufficient free storage available.
           28  File not found.
         1xxx  Error xxx reading input file.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     208
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                 RDRCOST (EXEC)
 
         Use the RDRCOST command to display information and estimated charges
         for one or more reader spool files.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +       +                                              |
         | RDRCOST   | |ALL    |                                              |
         |           | |spoolid|                                              |
         |           | |*      |                                              |
         |           | +       +                                              |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ALL       indicates that information about all reader files is to be
                   displayed.  This is the default.
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader file to be displayed.
 
         *         indicates that information on the first reader file is to be
                   displayed.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The block count and charges given by the RDRCOST command are
              estimates determined by the number of lines in the file and an
              estimated average line length based on the type of the file
              (print, punch, etc.).  Obtaining more accurate figures entails so
              much system overhead that it is impractical.
 
          2.  RDRCOST will not find a held reader file unless ALL is specified.
 
          3.  If a specific spool file number is given, the specified file
              becomes the first file in your reader.
 
          4.  RDRCOST uses the STKXRDR command with the COST parameter to
              obtain information about spool files.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSKXR070E "parm" is not a valid parameter.  RC=24
         DMSRDR655E There are no files in your reader.  RC=28
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     209
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         RENAME
 
         Use the RENAME command to change the fileid of a CMS disk file.  This
         is only a summary of the most frequently needed function of the RENAME
         command, not a complete description.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RENAME    | fileid1 fileid2                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fileid1   is the filename, filetype, and filemode of the file to be
                   renamed.  Any part of the fileid may be specified as "*" to
                   indicate a group of files matching the other parts of the
                   fileid.
 
         fileid2   is the new filename, filetype, and filemode.  Equal signs
                   may be used to indicate portions of the fileid that are to
                   remain unchanged.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  The RENAME command cannot be used to change the filemode letter
              of a file, although it can be used to change the filemode number.
              The filemode letter is under the control of the ACCESS command.
              The filemode number of a CMS disk file indicates certain
              attributes.  Use the filemode number with care!  The following
              values can be used:
 
       |       0  General use, but filemode number 0 makes a file generally
                  inaccessible to users with a read-only link to the disk.
               1  General use.  This is the default.
               2  General use.
               3  Scratch file.  CMS erases a file with filemode number 3
                  after it has been read once.
               4  OS simulation file.  Don't use filemode number 4 unless you
                  have an understanding of OS simulation.
               5  General use.
       |       6  Update-in-place.
 
          2.  RENAME has other options and functions.  Refer to the VM/SP CMS
              Command and Macro Reference or the online HELP command for
              details.
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     210
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                        REPRINT
 
         Use the REPRINT command to create a printer spool file from the first
         file in your reader, retaining the carriage control information.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | REPRINT   | [name [type]]  [( [HOLD] [PRINTABLE] [)]]              |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         name [type]
                   specify a new spool file name and type for the printer spool
                   file.  The defaults are the spool file name and type of the
                   original reader file.
 
         Options
 
         HOLD      retains the original reader spool file.  The default is to
                   purge the original file unless an error occurs.
 
         PRINTABLe restricts the data in the output file to an all-uppercase
                   64-character set.  All unprintable characters and lowercase
                   letters are translated to blanks.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  REPRINT takes one reader spool file (the first PRT or CON file)
              and creates a printer spool file.  The new file is sent to the
              current printer destination (set with the SETPRT command).  The
              OUTPUT command is much more efficient if you want simply to
              transfer a file.  REPRINT has the ability to retain the original
              file, which OUTPUT cannot do.  REPRINT can also be used to gather
              several reader files into a single file for printing (see the
              GATHER command).
 
          2.  REPRINT can process only PRT (print) and CON (console) files.  It
              can't handle PUN files or files that have been held with the
              CHANGE RDR command.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         THE TAG FOR PRINTER FILE nnnn WAS: text
         mm LINES WITH UNPRINTABLE CHARACTERS WERE FOUND.
         NO INPUT PRINT FILE FOUND.  RC=4
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     211
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  RETRIEVE (CP)
 
         Use the RETRIEVE command to retrieve input lines on a 3101 or
         3270-type terminal.  The RETRIEVE command can be used only from a
         Program Function (PF) key.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RETrieve  |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  RETRIEVE can be used only on 3101 or 3270-type terminals equipped
              with Program Function (PF) keys.  To use RETRIEVE, issue the CP
              SET command in the following form:
 
                   CP SET PFn RETRIEVE
 
              where "n" is a PF key number.  Do not specify the DELAY or
              IMMEDIATE parameters of the SET PF command.
 
              When a PF key set to RETRIEVE is pressed, the previous input line
              will be placed in the input area of the screen.  The most
              recently entered input lines are recorded for possible recall; if
              the PF key is pressed again, the preceding line will be
              retrieved.  After all of the retained lines are retrieved,
              pressing the PF key again will recall the first saved line.  Null
              (empty) input lines, duplicated lines, and lines entered with
              display off (such as passwords) are not saved.  Programs which
              manage the screen and PF keys themselves (such as BROWSE, FLIST,
              XEDIT, and XMENU) override the RETRIEVE feature; it will not
              function while they are in control.
 
          2.  The CMS recall function (?) may be used on any terminal to
              display the last command entered at the terminal or through the
              CMS program stack.  Lines entered in CP mode or using #CP cannot
              be recalled with the CMS function.
 
       |  3.  On local 3270-type terminals TEST REQ (Test Request) and all
       |      unassigned PF keys function as RETRIEVE.  You cannot change the
       |      function of the TEST REQ key.
 
          4.  The keyword "RECALL" is also supported for this function to
              provide compatibility with previous releases of VM/SP.
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     212
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                             RH
 
         Use the RH (Resume Help) command to return to the Yale HELP (YHELP)
         system at the point you last left it during this terminal session.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RH        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         NO ACTIVE HELP ENVIRONMENT
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     213
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                             RT (CMS Immediate Command)
 
         Use the RT (Resume Typing) command to resume terminal output during a
         CMS command after HT has been issued.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RT        |                                                        |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  CMS immediate commands are accepted only from the terminal.  They
              may not be issued from an EXEC.  The SET CMSTYPE RT command can
              be used to resume terminal output within an EXEC.
 
          2.  The SET IMMEDIATE command can be used to disable the CMS
              immediate commands.  QUERY IMMEDIATE to determine the current
              setting.  The initial setting is SET IMMEDIATE ON.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         None.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     214
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                          RUNID
 
         Use the RUNID command to obtain information about OS batch jobs and
         HASP printed output routed to CENTRAL that were submitted from your
         userid.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | RUNID     | [ALL]                                                  |
         |           |                                                        |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         ALL       causes all information retained by the system for jobs you
                   have submitted to be displayed.  The RUNID FILE is updated
                   with those jobs which have not previously been displayed.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  RUNID displays the runid, the job name, and other information for
              each job.  The information is also placed in a file on your A-
              disk called "RUNID FILE".  If the RUNID command detects errors
              while writing the information into the RUNID FILE, an error
              message will be issued and the information will be displayed on
              your terminal.  The ALL parameter can be used to redisplay the
              job information.
 
          2.  You are responsible for maintaining your RUNID FILE.  The file
              can be modified as desired, although it should be left in
              variable-length format.  You may want to occasionally erase the
              file to conserve disk space.
 
          3.  RUNID can be used to obtain information about a job after it has
              been read by the OS batch system.  This information will be
              retained for at least twenty-four hours or through a weekend.
              Once a job has been displayed by RUNID, this information will not
              be displayed again unless the ALL parameter is specified.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSRID037E DISK 'A' IS READ/ONLY.  RC=28
         DMSRID069E DISK 'A' NOT ACCESSED.  RC=28
         DMSRID070E INVALID PARAMETER 'parameter'.  RC=24
         DMSRID105S ERROR 'n' WRITING FILE 'fn fm ft' ON DISK.  RC=100
         DMSRID107S DISK 'A' IS FULL.  RC=100
         DMSRID934S FATAL RUNID ERROR.
         DMSRID939I NO RUNIDS FOUND.
         DMSRID940I RUNID FACILITY TEMPORARILY OVERLOADED -- TRY AGAIN LATER.
         DMSRID941I RUNID FACILITY TEMPORARILY OUT OF SERVICE.
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     215
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                  RXEDIT (EXEC)
 
         Use the RXEDIT command to examine a reader spool file with the System
         Product editor (XEDIT).  The spool file cannot be modified, but it can
         be erased or saved as a CMS disk file, with or without modifications.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           | +           +                                          |
         | RXedit    | |spoolid [*]|  [file] [( options [)]]                  |
         |           | |name [type]|                                          |
         |           | | *     *   |                                          |
         |           | +           +                                          |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         spoolid   is the spool file number of the reader spool file to be
                   processed.  The default is "*", the first file in your
                   reader.
 
         name [type]
                   specify an input file by spool file name and type rather
                   than number.  Spool files do not necessarily have names and
                   types.  The default type is "*," the first file that matches
                   the specified name.
 
         options   are INPUT command options.  Except for the file destination
                   options (APPEND, DISK, REPLACE, SELECT, STACK, and XEDIT),
                   any INPUT option may be specified.  The NOHOLD option is
                   ignored.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  RXEDIT assigns a filename using the spool file type and the spool
              file number.  This special name is used by the BURN subcommand.
              The filetype is "LISTING" and the filemode is "A1."
 
          2.  The BURN subcommand purges the reader file if you have not
              altered the XEDIT filename and filetype.  If the file still
              exists when you have completed your editing session, you will be
              asked if you want to keep the file.
 
          3.  You can write the file to disk under another name by issuing the
              FILE or SAVE subcommand with a fileid (e.g., "FILE SOME OUTPUT").
 
          4.  RXEDIT will use your XEDIT profile.
 
          5.  RXEDIT uses an XEDIT macro named RINPUT that uses the CMS command
              INPUT to read the spool file.  The RINPUT macro can be used alone
              from within XEDIT to read another spool file.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     216
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                             SAS (EXEC)
 
         Use the SAS command to execute the CMS Statistical Analysis System.
         This is not a complete description of SAS; refer to the manuals listed
         in the Usage Notes for details.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |                                                        |
         | SAS       | [filename [filename...]]  [( options... [)]]           |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +      +   +      +   +      +                         |
         |           | |LDisk |   |PDisk |   |NOTLog|                         |
         |           | |LPrint|   |PPrint|   |TLog  |                         |
         |           | |LType |   |PType |   +      +                         |
         |           | +      +   +      +                                    |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +           +                                          |
         |           | |TMSG NOTEs |    NAme filename                         |
         |           | |     ERRORs|                                          |
         |           | |     OFF   |    SASLIB filename                       |
         |           | +           +                                          |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         filename  is the name of a CMS disk file containing SAS program
                   statements.  More than one filename can be specified.  The
                   filetypes must be "SAS," and the files must contain fixed-
                   length 80-byte records.  If no filenames are specified, SAS
                   executes in interactive mode.
 
         Options
 
         LDisk     writes the SAS log to a CMS disk file with filetype
                   "SASLOG."  The filename of the SASLOG file is determined by
                   the name of the first SAS source file (in interactive mode
                   the filename "SAS" is used), or by the NAME option.
 
         LPrint    sends the SAS log to a printer spool file.
 
         LType     types the SAS log at the terminal.
 
         NAme filename
                   is the filename assigned to printed procedure output
                   (LISTING file), SAS log (SASLOG file), and TLOG output (SAS
                   file).  "SAS" is the default filename.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     217
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
       |                                                             SAS (EXEC)
 
         NOTLog    suppresses recording of SAS statements in a CMS disk file.
                   This is the default.
 
         PDisk     writes the printed procedure output to a CMS disk file with
                   filetype "LISTING."  The filename of the LISTING file is
                   determined by the name of the first SAS source file (in
                   interactive mode the filename "SAS" is used), or by the NAME
                   option.
 
         PPrint    sends the printed procedure output to a printer spool file.
 
         PType     types the printed procedure output at the terminal.
 
         SASLIB filename
                   issues a FILEDEF with DD name "SASLIB" for the specified
                   TXTLIB.  This TXTLIB is added to the TXTLIB's searched by
                   SAS.
 
         TLog      records SAS statements entered at the terminal in a CMS disk
                   file with a filetype of "SAS."  The filename of the LISTING
                   file is determined by the NAME option.  TLOG is only valid
                   in interactive mode.
 
         TMSG level
                   controls which messages are typed at the terminal when not
                   in interactive mode.  The default message level is ERRORS,
                   which displays only error messages.  You can specify NOTES,
                   for notes and error messages, or OFF, to suppress all
                   messages.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  SAS has its own online help.  Enter "help;" in interactive mode.
              Also refer to SAS User's Guide: Basics, SAS Companion for the
              VM/CMS Operating System, and SAS/FSP User's Guide.
 
          2.  End interactive SAS by entering "/*."
 
          3.  The SAS command links to and accesses the disk containing the SAS
              modules and related files, then drops the link before completing.
              If SAS ABEND's (or if you stop it with an HX) the link is not
              dropped.
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSSAS985E SAS requires at least 1M of storage.  Use the STORAGE
                    command to increase your storage size.  RC=25
 
         Messages can be produced by SAS, and by the LINK and ACCESS commands.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     218
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           SCAN
 
         Use the SCAN command to check OS Job Control Language (JCL) syntax
         without submitting a batch job.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |    +     +    ++                                       |
         | SCAN      | fn | ft  | fm ||  [(options... [)]]                    |
         |           |    | JOB | *  ||                                       |
         |           |    | JCL +    +|                                       |
         |           |    +           +                                       |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | Options:                                               |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +         +  +        +  +          +                  |
         |           | | NOPRint |  | TErm   |  | SOurce   |                  |
         |           | | TYpe    |  | NOTErm |  | NOSOurce |                  |
         |           | | DIsk    |  +        +  +          +                  |
         |           | | PRint   |                                            |
         |           | +         +                                            |
         |           |                                                        |
         |           | +     +  +        +  +          +  +         +         |
         |           | | MVT |  | UKcc   |  | PROClib  |  | NOSYsin |         |
         |           | | MFT |  | NOUKcc |  | NOPROCli |  | SYsin   |         |
         |           | +     +  +        +  +          +  +         +         |
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
 
         where
 
         fn        specifies the filename of the file to be scanned and the
                   filename of the listing output file, if any.
 
         ft        specifies the filetype of the file to be scanned.  If
                   omitted, "JOB" and "JCL" will be used, in that order.
 
         fm        specifies the filemode of the file to be scanned.  If not
                   specified, "*" will be assumed and all accessed disks
                   searched.
 
         Options
 
         DIsk      writes the LISTING file on your A-disk.
 
         NOPRint   suppresses generation of the listing file.
 
         NOTErm    suppresses the TERM output.
 
         MFT       uses OS/360-MFT JCL syntax.
 
         MVT       uses OS/360-MVT JCL syntax.
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     219
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           SCAN
 
         NOPROCli  suppresses procedure library processing.
 
         NOSOurce  suppresses the JCL listing.
 
         NOSYsin   suppresses data listing.
 
         NOUKcc    will not process HASP or INCLUDE records.
 
         PRint     writes the LISTING file to a printer spool file.
 
         PROClib   causes a procedure library to be searched for referenced
                   procedures.
 
         SOurce    produces a JCL listing.
 
         SYsin     causes input stream data (DD * and DD DATA) to be listed.
 
         TErm      writes the diagnostic messages on the terminal.
 
         TYpe      writes the LISTING file to the terminal.
 
         UKcc      will cause HASP /* and SUBMIT command ..INCLUDE records to
                   be processed.  Syntax is not checked for HASP control
                   records.
 
         Usage Notes
 
          1.  If the DISK or SYSIN options are specified a write-accessed A-
              disk is necessary for the "fn LISTING A1" and "SCAN SYSUT1 A3"
              files.
 
          2.  Unless the NOPROC option is specified a procedure library will be
              used.  The default libraries are SYS4.PROCLIB and SYS2.PROCLIB.
              Since these are assumed by default to reside on OS disks, OS
              formatted disks containing these files must be accessed.
              Currently both default proclib's are on volume UKC004.  This disk
              must be accessed before the SCAN command is issued (the OSDISKS
              command should be used for this purpose).
 
          3.  It is possible to override the default proclib's used by SCAN.
              The DD name used by SCAN for the proclib is IEFPDSI, so by
              defining IEFPDSI with one or more FILEDEF commands and issuing a
              GLOBAL command it is possible to specify any desired combination
              of user and system libraries.  The libraries may be on OS or CMS
              disks, or both.  The following example demonstrates this
              capability:
 
                OSDISK
                FILEDEF IEFPDSI DISK MYLIB MACLIB * DSN MYLIB PROCLIB ( CONCAT
                FILEDEF IEFPDSI DISK SYS4 MACLIB * DSN SYS4 PROCLIB ( CONCAT
                GLOBAL MACLIB MYLIB SYS4
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     220
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           SCAN
 
                SCAN MYJOB
 
              This would cause MYLIB.PROCLIB and SYS4.PROCLIB to be used as
              proclib's.  Note that the CONCAT option must be used if more than
              one proclib is to be used.
 
          4.  SCAN will clear all non-permanent FILEDEF's at completion.
 
          5.  There are several minor differences between the results obtained
              from SCAN and those from the OS batch system:
 
                   (a)  The CLASS parameter on the JOB card will not be
                        accepted as valid if it contains X or Z.
 
                   (b)  The DLM parameter on the DD card must be enclosed
                        in single quotes if it contains special characters.
 
                   (c)  The UKCC project number on the job card is not
                        checked for validity.
 
          6.  A null JCL statement will be generated at the end of a listing.
 
          7.  The //PROCLIB DD for user proclib's is not supported.  A
              //PROCLIB DD referring to a cataloged dataset will cause a
              warning message to be issued; other forms will cause SCAN to
              ABEND.  To refer to other than the default system proclib's, use
              the procedure above to define IEFPDSI.
 
          8.  SCAN checks only the syntax of JCL statements.  There are many
              other JCL-related errors that will not be caught.  For example:
 
                   (a)  Specifying a nonexistent program in the PGM
                        parameter of the EXEC card.
 
                   (b)  Specifying a nonexistent dataset or volume.
 
                   (c)  Specifying a nonexistent or inconsistent
                        unit in the UNIT parameter of the DD card.
 
          9.  The MSGLEVEL parameter on the JOB card can be used to control the
              output produced by SCAN.
 
         10.  The message IEF110I will be issued if SCAN has insufficient
              working storage to process your JCL.  You can try breaking your
       |      JCL into smaller segments or redefining your storage size with
       |      the STORAGE command to circumvent this problem.
 
         11.  Help information is available for OS JCL.  Enter "HELP JCL" for
              details.
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     221
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                           SCAN
 
         Messages and Return Codes
 
         DMSJCL001E NO FILENAME SPECIFIED  RC=24
         DMSJCL002E INPUT FILE "fn ft fm" NOT FOUND  RC=28
         DMSJCL002E PROCLIB FILES NOT FOUND  RC=28
         DMSJCL003E INVALID OPTION "option"  RC=24
         DMSJCL004W WARNING MESSAGES ISSUED  RC=4
         DMSJCL006E NO READ/WRITE "A" DISK ACCESSED FOR "fn LISTING A1" RC=36
         DMSJCL008W ERROR MESSAGES ISSUED  RC=8
         DMSJCL012W SEVERE ERROR MESSAGES ISSUED  RC=12
         DMSJCL016W TERMINAL ERROR MESSAGES ISSUED  RC=16
         DMSJCL032E INVALID FILETYPE "ft"  RC=24
         DMSJCL044E RECORD LENGTH EXCEEDS ALLOWABLE MAXIMUM  RC=32
         DMSJCL048E INVALID MODE "fm"  RC=24
         DMSJCL062E INVALID "*" IN FILEID  RC=20
         DMSJCL062E INVALID CHAR IN FILEID "fn ft fm"  RC=20
         DMSJCL069E DISK "fm" NOT ACCESSED  RC=36
         DMSJCL104S ERROR "nn" READING FILE "fn ft fm" FROM DISK  ABEND 001
         DMSJCL105S ERROR "nn" WRITING FILE "fn ft fm" TO DISK  ABEND 001
         DMSJCL901T UNEXPECTED ERROR AT "address"  ABEND 999
         DMSJCL901T UNEXPECTED ERROR: PLIST "function", RC "nn"  RC=256
 
         IEE345I COMMAND AUTHORITY INVALID  NON-FATAL
         IEF110I Q MGR I/O ERR - JOBQUE FULL  ABEND 1B0
         IEF440I I/O ERROR IN THE JOB QUEUE 0042  ABEND 0B0
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                                       Section 2:  Command Descriptions     222
 
 
         CMS Reference
 
 
 
 
                                                                         SCRIPT
 
         Use the SCRIPT command to format documents and other text.  SCRIPT
         accepts text and control words as input and produces output suitable
         for printing on a line printer or terminal.  This is not a complete
         description of the options available with the SCRIPT command.
 
         +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
         |           |              +       +  +          +                   |
         | SCript    | filename  [( |FFTOp n|  |PLength nn|  [)]]             |
       | |           | ?            |      4|  |